Handleiding Panasonic DMC-G10K (pagina 190 van 200) (Engels)

452174

190

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/200

Pagina verder

VQT2S62

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product,

please read the instructions completely.

For USA and Puerto Rico assistance, please call: 1-800-211-PANA(7262) or,

For Canadian assistance, please call: 1-800-99-LUMIX (1-800-995-8649) or

send e-mail to: lumixconcierge@ca.panasonic.com

Operating Instructions

Digital Camera/Lens Kit

Model No. DMC-G10K

until

2010/5/7

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 1 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Dear Customer,

Thank you for choosing Panasonic!

You have purchased one of the most sophisticated and reliable products on the market

today. Used properly, we’re sure it will bring you and your family years of enjoyment.

Please take time to fill in the model and serial numbers in the space below. The serial

number is on the tag located on the underside of your Camera. Be sure to retain this

manual as your convenient Camera information source. Please note that the actual

controls and components, menu items, etc. of your Digital Camera may look somewhat

different from those shown in the illustrations in these Operating Instructions.

Carefully observe copyright laws.

•

Recording of pre-recorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material for purposes

other than your own private use may infringe copyright laws. Even for the purpose of private

use, recording of certain material may be restricted.

Information for Your Safety

A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have

purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to

recycle this battery.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE,

•

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR

SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES,

SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

• USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.

• DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

THE SOCKET OUTLET SHALL BE INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND SHALL

BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE.

Product Identification Marking is located on the bottom of units.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 2 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN CANADA.

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

FCC Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation

instructions and use only shielded interface cables with ferrite core when

connecting to computer or peripheral devices.

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Declaration of Conformity

Trade Name: Panasonic

Model No.: DMC-G10

Responsible party: Panasonic Corporation of North America

One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094

Support Contact:

Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company 1-800-211-PANA (7262)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

DMC-G10

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 3 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

∫ About the battery pack

•

Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of

time with doors and windows closed.

∫ About the battery charger

CAUTION

Battery pack (Lithium ion battery pack)

•

Use the specified unit to recharge the battery pack.

• Do not use the battery pack with equipment other than the specified unit.

• Do not get dirt, sand, liquids, or other foreign matter on the terminals.

• Do not touch the plug terminals (i and j) with metal objects.

• Do not disassemble, remodel, heat or throw into fire.

If any electrolyte should come into contact with your hands or clothes, wash it off

thoroughly with water.

If any electrolyte should come into contact with your eyes, never rub the eyes. Rinse

eyes thoroughly with water, and then consult a doctor.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries

according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Warning

Risk of fire, explosion and burns. Do not disassemble, heat above 60 xC (140 oF) or

incinerate.

CAUTION!

•

DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE, BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN

ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE. ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT

CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION

VENTS.

• DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS WITH NEWSPAPERS,

TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND SIMILAR ITEMS.

•

DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE

UNIT.

• DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY MANNER.

Battery charger/AC adaptor

This battery charger/AC adaptor operates on AC between 110 V and 240 V.

But

•

In the U.S.A. and Canada, the battery charger/AC adaptor must be connected to a 120 V

AC power supply only.

• When connecting to an AC supply outside of the U.S.A. or Canada, use a plug adaptor to

suit the AC outlet configuration.

• When connecting to a supply of greater than AC 125 V, ensure the cord you use is suited to

the voltage of the AC supply and the rated current of the battery charger/AC adaptor.

• Contact an electrical parts distributor for assistance in selecting a suitable AC plug adaptor

or AC cord set.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 4 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

• The battery charger is in the standby condition when the AC power supply cord is connected.

The primary circuit is always “live” as long as the power cord is connected to an electrical

outlet.

∫ Care of the camera

•

Do not strongly shake or bump the camera by dropping or hitting it. Do not subject to

strong pressure.

The camera may malfunction, recording pictures may become impossible, or the lens, the LCD

monitor or the external case may be damaged.

• Be particularly careful in the following places as they may cause this unit to

malfunction.

– Places with a lot of sand or dust.

– Places where water can come into contact with this unit such as when using it on a rainy day

or on a beach.

• Do not touch the lens or the sockets with dirty hands. Also, be careful not to allow

liquids, sand and other foreign matter to get into the space around the lens, buttons etc.

• This camera is not waterproof. If water or seawater splashes on the camera, use a dry

cloth to wipe the camera body carefully.

If the unit does not operate normally, please contact the dealer where you purchased the

camera or the repair service center.

• Do not place your hands inside the mount of the digital camera body. Since the sensor

unit is a precision apparatus, it may cause a malfunction or damage.

∫ About Condensation (When the lens or the Viewfinder is fogged up)

•

Condensation occurs when the ambient temperature or humidity changes. Be careful of

condensation since it causes lens stains, fungus and camera malfunction.

• If condensation occurs, turn the camera off and leave it for about 2 hours. The fog will

disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient

temperature.

∫ Read together with the “Cautions for Use”. (P165)

-If you see this symbol-

Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union

This symbol is only valid in the European Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local

authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 5 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Contents

Information for Your Safety....................... 2

Before Use

Standard Accessories............................... 9

Names of the Components..................... 11

Operating the Rear Dial.......................... 14

About the Lens ....................................... 15

Preparation

Attaching/Detaching the Lens................. 17

Attaching the Lens Hood ........................ 19

Attaching the Shoulder Strap.................. 20

Charging the Battery............................... 21

• Approximate operating time and

number of recordable pictures ......... 23

Inserting and Removing the Card

(optional)/the Battery .............................. 24

About the Card ....................................... 25

Setting Date/Time (Clock Set)................ 26

• Changing the clock setting ............... 26

Setting the Menu .................................... 27

• Setting menu items........................... 28

Setting the Quick Menu.......................... 30

About the Setup Menu............................ 31

Holding and using Your Camera ............ 36

Selecting the [REC] Mode ...................... 37

Basic

Taking Pictures using the Automatic

Function (Intelligent Auto Mode)............. 39

• Scene detection................................ 40

• AF Tracking Function ....................... 41

• Settings in Intelligent Auto Mode...... 41

Taking Pictures with Your Favorite

Settings (Program AE Mode).................. 43

• Setting the Focus Mode

(AFS/AFC/MF) ................................. 44

• Focusing........................................... 45

• When the subject is not in focus....... 45

• Preventing jitter (camera shake)....... 45

• Program Shift ................................... 46

Taking Pictures with the Zoom ............... 47

• Using the Optical Zoom/using the

Extended Optical Zoom (EZ)/

using the Digital Zoom ..................... 47

Playing Back Pictures............................. 49

• Changing the information displayed

on the playback screen ........................50

• Displaying multiple screens

(Multi Playback)................................ 50

• Displaying Pictures by Recording

Date (Calendar Playback)................ 51

• Using the Playback Zoom................. 51

Deleting Pictures .................................... 52

• To delete a single picture ................. 52

• To delete multiple pictures (up to 50)

or all the pictures..................................53

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Switching the Display of the LCD Monitor/

Viewfinder ...................................................54

• Switching the Information Displayed

on the recording screen........................54

Taking Pictures using the Built-in Flash......57

• Switching to the appropriate flash

setting............................................... 57

• Adjust the flash output......................61

• Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro... 62

Compensating the Exposure .................. 63

Taking Pictures using Burst Mode.......... 64

Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket........ 66

Taking Pictures with the Self-timer......... 68

Setting the Method used to Focus

(AF Mode)............................................... 69

• Setting up [ ] (AF Tracking) .......... 71

• Setting the AF area........................... 72

Taking Pictures with Manual Focus........ 73

Fixing the Focus and the Exposure

(AF/AE Lock).......................................... 75

Adjusting the White Balance................... 76

• Setting the White Balance manually .....77

• Setting the color temperature ........... 78

• Finely adjusting the White Balance.......78

• White Balance Bracket ..................... 79

Setting the Light Sensitivity .................... 79

Change Tone of the Color for the Picture

to be taken (Film Mode)..............................81

• Adjusting each Film Mode to the

desired setting.................................. 82

• Multi Film Bracket............................. 83

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 6 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Taking Pictures by Specifying

the Aperture/Shutter Speed ....................84

• Aperture-priority AE ..........................84

• Shutter-priority AE.............................84

Taking Picture by Setting the Exposure

Manually..................................................85

Confirm the Effects of Aperture and

Shutter Speed (Preview Mode)...............87

Taking Expressive Portraits and Landscape

Pictures (Advanced Scene Mode).............. 88

• [PORTRAIT]......................................89

• [SCENERY].......................................90

• [SPORTS].........................................90

• [CLOSE-UP]......................................91

• [NIGHT PORTRAIT]..........................92

Taking Pictures that match the Scene

being recorded (Scene Mode) ................93

• ï [SUNSET]...................................93

• 2 [PARTY] .....................................94

• : [BABY1]/; [BABY2] .................94

• í [PET] ..........................................95

• [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS]........95

Taking Pictures while Adjusting Color

(My Color Mode) .....................................96

• Adjusting the custom settings to

achieve desired effects.....................97

Registering Personal Menu Settings

(Registering custom settings) .................98

Taking Pictures in Custom Mode............99

Motion Picture Mode.............................100

Taking a Picture with Face Recognition

Function................................................104

• Face Settings..................................105

• Setting Auto Registration/

Sensitivity .......................................108

• Auto Registration ............................109

Useful Functions at Travel

Destinations ..........................................110

• Recording which Day of the

Vacation You Take the Picture .......110

• Recording Dates/Times at Overseas

Travel Destinations (World Time)...112

Using the [REC] Mode Menu ................113

• [FILM MODE] ...........................113

• ? [ASPECT RATIO].....................113

• @ [PICTURE SIZE] ......................114

• A [QUALITY]................................115

• [FACE RECOG.] ......................115

• [STABILIZER]...........................116

• [FLASH]....................................116

• [RED-EYE REMOVAL].............117

• [FLASH SYNCHRO].................117

• [FLASH ADJUST.]....................117

• C [METERING MODE].................118

• [I.RESOLUTION]......................118

• [I.EXPOSURE] (Intelligent

exposure adjustment)...............119

• [ISO LIMIT SET].......................119

• [ISO INCREMENTS] ................119

• [LONG SHTR NR] ....................120

• [EX. OPT. ZOOM] ....................120

• ) [DIGITAL ZOOM]......................120

• [BURST RATE].........................120

• [AUTO BRACKET] ...................121

• [SELF-TIMER]..........................121

• [COLOR SPACE] .....................121

• B [AUDIO REC.] ..........................122

Using the [MOTION PICTURE]

Mode Menu...........................................122

• [REC QUALITY] .......................122

• [CONTINUOUS AF]..................123

• [WIND CUT] .............................123

Using the [CUSTOM] Menu ..................123

Entering Text.........................................129

Advanced (Playback)

Playing Back Motion Pictures/Pictures

with Audio .............................................130

• Motion pictures................................130

• Pictures with audio..........................131

Using the [PLAYBACK] Mode Menu.....131

• [SLIDE SHOW].........................131

• [PLAYBACK MODE].................133

• Ü [FAVORITE] .............................134

• [TITLE EDIT] ............................135

• [TEXT STAMP].........................136

• Q [RESIZE] Reducing the picture

size (number of pixels).............139

• [CROPPING] ............................140

• ? [ASPECT CONV.].....................141

•

[ROTATE]/

[ROTATE DISP.] .... 142

• [PRINT SET].............................143

• P [PROTECT]..............................144

• [FACE REC EDIT]....................145

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 7 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Connecting to other equipment

Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .....146

• Playing back pictures using the AV

cable (supplied).............................. 146

• Playing back pictures on a TV with

an SD Memory Card slot................ 147

• Playing back on the TV with HDMI

socket............................................. 147

Connecting to a PC .............................. 152

Printing the Pictures ............................. 154

• Selecting a single picture and

printing it......................................... 155

• Selecting multiple pictures and

printing them .................................. 155

• Print Settings .................................. 156

Others

Using an External Flash (optional) ....... 158

Using the Protector/Filter (optional)...... 159

Using the Remote Shutter (optional) .... 160

Using the AC Adaptor........................... 161

LCD Monitor Display/Viewfinder

Display.................................................. 162

Cautions for Use................................... 165

Message Display .................................. 169

Troubleshooting.................................... 172

Number of Recordable Pictures and

Available Recording Time..................... 181

Specifications ....................................... 186

Digital Camera Accessory System ....... 190

Digital Camera Accessory Order Form

(For USA and Puerto Rico Customers).....192

Limited Warranty

(ONLY FOR U.S.A. AND PUERTO RICO)... 193

Index..................................................... 196

Useful Information

(For Latin American Countries Only).... 199

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 8 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

Standard Accessories

Check that all the accessories are included before using the camera.

Product numbers correct as of April 2010. These may be subject to change.

1 Digital Camera Body

(This is referred to as camera body in these operating instructions.)

2 Interchangeable Lens

“LUMIX G VARIO 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.”

(This is referred to as lens in these operating instructions.)

3 Lens Hood

4 Lens Cap

(This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.)

5 Lens Rear Cap

(This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.)

6 Lens Storage Bag

7 Battery Pack

(Indicated as battery pack or battery in the text)

Charge the battery before use.

8 Battery Charger/AC Adaptor

(Indicated as battery charger or charger in the text)

9 AC Cable

10 AV Cable

11 USB Connection Cable

12 Body Cap

(This is attached to the camera body at the time of purchase.)

13 CD-ROM

•

Software:

Use it to install the software to your PC.

14 Shoulder Strap

•

SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in the

text.

• The card is optional.

• Description in these operating instructions is based on the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included

in DMC-G10K.

• For information about optional accessories, refer to the “Digital Camera Accessory System”.

(P190)

• If any accessories are lost, customers in the USA and Puerto Rico should contact Panasonic’s

parts department at 1-800-833-9626 and customers in Canada should contact 1-800-99-LUMIX

(1-800-995-8649) for further information about obtaining replacement parts.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 9 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

1234 5

6789 10

11 12 13 14

H-FS014042 VYC1009 VYF3201 VFC4315

DMW-BLB13PPVFC4456 DE-A49B

K2CA2EA00002 K1HA08CD0020

VKF4385

K1HA08AD0003

VFC4539

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 10 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

Names of the Components

∫ Camera body

1 Flash (P57)

2 Sensor

3 Self-timer indicator (P68)

AF Assist Lamp (P126)

4 Lens release button (P18)

5 Lens lock pin

6 Mount

7 Lens fitting mark (P17)

•

Refer to P14 for operation of the rear dial.

8 [LVF/LCD] button (P36)

9 Diopter adjustment dial (P37)

10 Viewfinder (P36, 55, 162)

11 Playback button (P49, 52, 130, 146, 147,

149)

12 [AF/AE LOCK] button (P75)

13 Camera ON/OFF switch (P26)

14 Rear dial (P46, 50, 51, 63, 72, 79, 84, 85,

131, 140)

15 [DISPLAY] button (P50, 54, 87)

16 Eye Cup (P166)

17 LCD monitor (P36, 54, 162)

18 [Q.MENU] button (P30)

19 Delete button (P52)/

Preview button (P87)/

Flicker Reduction Function (P101)

20 [MENU/SET] button (P26)

21 Cursor buttons

3/ISO (P79)

2/AF Mode (P69)

4/Function button (P123)

Rear dial is described as follows in these operating instructions.

e.g.: Rotating left or right e.g.: Pressing the rear dial

76 5 4

10 11

17 18

12 13

14 15

16 19 20

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 11 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

Assign Menu to 4 button. It is convenient to register a Menu that is used often.

[FILM MODE]/[ASPECT RATIO]/[QUALITY]/[METERING MODE]/[I.RESOLUTION]/

[I.EXPOSURE]/[EX. OPT. ZOOM]/[GUIDE LINE]

1/WB (White Balance) (P76)

22 Focus mode dial (P39, 43, 44, 69, 73, 100)

23 Microphone (P100, 122)

24 Drive mode lever

Single (P43):

Burst (P64):

Auto Bracket (P66):

Self-timer (P68):

25 Shutter button (P39, 100)

26 Focus distance reference mark (P74)

27 Flash open lever (P57)

28 Hot shoe (P158)

29 Mode dial (P37)

30 Status indicator (P39)

31 Intelligent Auto button (P39)

32 [REMOTE] socket (P160)

33 Shoulder strap eyelet (P20)

•

Be sure to attach the shoulder strap when

using the camera to ensure that you will not

drop it.

34 [HDMI] socket (P147, 149)

35 [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket (P146, 152, 154)

36 DC cable cover (P161)

In these operating instructions, the cursor buttons are described as shown in the

figure below or described with 3/4/2/1.

e.g.: When you press the 4 (down) button

or Press 4

/SET

2827

252322

31302926

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 12 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

37 Card/Battery door (P24)

38 Release lever (P24)

39 Tripod receptacle (P169)

•

When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod

is stable when the camera is attached to it.

∫ Lens

H-FS014042 (LUMIX G VARIO 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.)

40 Tele

41 Lens surface

42 Focus ring (P73)

43 Wide

44 Zoom ring (P47)

45 Contact point

46 Lens fitting mark (P17)

∫ Battery charger/AC adaptor (P21, 161)

47 Power input socket [AC IN]

48 [CHARGE] indicator

49 Power output socket [DC OUT]

50 Battery holder

393837

40 41 42 43 44 45 46

4948

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 13 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

Operating the Rear Dial

There are 2 ways to operate the rear dial, rotating left or right, and by pressing.

Rotating:

Selection of items or setting of values is performed during the various settings.

Pressing:

Operations that are the same as [MENU/SET] button, such as selection of settings

and exiting the menu, are performed during the various settings.

A Rear dial

¢1 Recording

¢2 Playback

Note

•

The sound of the rear dial operation may be recorded when operated during motion picture

recording.

Example of operation during Recording/

Playback screen

1 “Rotating” 2 “Pressing”

Adjustments of Program

Shift (P46), Aperture

(P84), Shutter Speed

(P84), etc.

Switching to

compensating the

exposure (P63) etc.

Multi (calendar)

Playback (P51),

Playback Zoom (P51)

Switching to Normal

Playback (during Multi

Playback), move

images while zoomed

(while using Playback

Zoom)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 14 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

About the Lens

This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with the Micro Four Thirds™ System

lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount).

Select a lens that matches the scene being recorded and your use of the pictures.

∫ “Micro Four Thirds Mount”

This is the lens mount standard for the

“Micro Four Thirds System”.

This was newly developed as an

interchangeable lens mount dedicated for

digital cameras.

∫ About the functions of your lens

•

Depending on the type of lens, you may not be able to use some functions such as the

Direction Detection function (P36), [STABILIZER] (P116), Quick AF (P125) and Continuous AF

(P125).

• The available flash range etc. differs depending on the aperture value of the lens you are using.

• Take some test pictures with the lens you are using.

• Lens with the Four Thirds™ mount

specification can be used by using the mount

adaptor (DMW-MA1; optional). Because of its

structure, Micro Four Thirds mount

specification lenses cannot be used on the

Four Thirds mount specification cameras. It

can only be used on the Micro Four Thirds

mount specification cameras.

• When you use the M mount adaptor or R mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M, DMW-MA3R; optional),

you can use Leica M Mount or Leica R Mount interchangeable lenses.

–For certain lenses, the actual distance at which the subject is in focus may differ slightly from

the rated distance.

–When using a Leica lens mount adaptor, set [SHOOT W/O LENS] (P128) to [ON].

• The focal distance of the employed lens is effectively doubled. (A 50 mm lens is equivalent to a

100 mm lens.)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 15 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Before Use

Interchangeable lenses that can be used with this unit and Auto Focus/Auto

Aperture Operation (As of April 2010)

(±: Usable, ¥: Some functions/features limited, —: Not usable)

¢1 Mount adaptor (DMW-MA1; optional) is necessary to use with this unit.

¢2 A Leica lens mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M or DMW-MA3R; optional) is necessary.

¢3 This function is not supported by some Micro Four Thirds mount specification lenses.

For lens operations, please see our website.

¢4 When recording motion pictures, the focus is continuously adjusted for both [AFS] and [AFC]

(P44).

¢5 AF Tracking is slower than the HD motion picture compatible lens (LUMIX G VARIO HD

lens), also the sound of Auto Focus operation may be recorded.

¢6 Auto Focus is activated only when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The sound of Auto

Focus operation may be recorded at this time.

¢7 The sound of Aperture operation may be recorded.

¢8 AF performance may differ depending on the lens used. Refer to the website for details.

Lens type

when recording still

pictures

while recording

motion pictures

Auto

Focus

Auto

aperture

setting

Auto

Focus

Auto

aperture

setting

Micro Four Thirds

mount specification

lens

The Lens included

in DMC-G10K.

(H-FS014042)

([AFS],

[AFC])

±¥

¢4, 5

¢7

Other Micro Four

Thirds mount

specification lens

¢3

Micro Four Thirds

mount specification

lens compatible to

HD motion pictures

(LUMIX G VARIO

HD)

([AFS],

[AFC])

±±

¢4

Four Thirds mount

specification lens

¢1

Four Thirds mount

specification lens

compatible to

contrast AF

([AFS])

±¥

¢6

¢7

Four Thirds mount

specification lens

not compatible to

contrast AF

¢8

([AFS])

±¥

¢6, 8

¢7

Leica mount

specification lens

¢2

Interchangeable

lens for Leica

————

Refer to catalogues/Web pages for most current information regarding compatible

lenses.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 16 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Attaching/Detaching the Lens

• Check that the camera is turned off.

• Close the flash.

Turn the lens rear cap A and the body cap B in the direction of the

arrow to detach them.

• Do not put your hands inside the mount.

Align the lens fitting marks C (red

marks) on the camera body and the lens

and then rotate the lens in the direction

of the arrow until it clicks.

• Do not press the lens release button D when you

attach a lens.

• Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an

angle to the camera body as the lens mount may

get scratched.

• Check that the lens is attached correctly.

Detach the lens cap.

• Detach the lens cap before taking pictures.

Attaching a lens to the camera body

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 17 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

∫ Optical Image Stabilizer

The lens included in DMC-G10K has a stabilizer function.

•

There is no [O.I.S.] switch on the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K. Set the

[STABILIZER] settings in the [REC] Mode menu. (P116)

Attach the lens cap.

Press the lens release button D while

turning the lens as far as possible in the

direction of the arrow to detach it.

• Always attach the body cap to the camera body so

that dirt or dust does not get inside.

• Attach the lens rear cap so that the lens contact

point does not get scratched.

Note

•

Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to P166 when dirt or dust gets on

the lens.

• When you turn the camera off or carry the camera, attach the lens cap to protect the surface of

the lens.

• Be careful not to lose the lens cap, the lens rear cap and the body cap.

When using a lens with an [O.I.S.] switch, it is

possible to set to enable the Optical Image Stabilizer

by switching the [O.I.S.] switch on the lens to [ON].

•

You can change the Optical Image Stabilizer Mode in

the [REC] Mode menu. (P116) It is set to [MODE1] at

the time of purchase.

• It is recommended to disable the Optical Image

Stabilizer when using a tripod. [ ] is displayed on

the screen at that time.

Example when a lens with the

[O.I.S.] switch is mounted.

Detaching a lens from the camera body

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 18 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Attaching the Lens Hood

In bright sunlight or backlight, the lens hood will minimize lens flare and ghosting. The lens

hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.

•

Check that the camera is turned off.

• Close the flash.

To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens

included in DMC-G10K

Insert the lens hood into the lens

with the short sides at the top and

bottom, and turn in the direction

of the arrow until it stops.

A Fitting to the mark.

∫ Temporarily storing the lens hood

1 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to

detach it.

2 Reverse the lens hood and then attach it in the same

way as shown previously.

•

Attach the lens cap.

• When temporarily storing the lens hood, check that it is firmly

attached and that it does not appear in the picture.

Note

•

Hold the short sides of the flower shaped lens hood when attaching or detaching it.

• When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo may

turn dark (vignetting effect) and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo

flash may be obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.

• When using the AF Assist Lamp in the dark, detach the lens hood.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 19 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Attaching the Shoulder Strap

• We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from

dropping.

Pass the shoulder strap through the

shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body.

A:Shoulder strap eyelet

Pass the end of the shoulder strap through

the ring in the direction of the arrow and

then pass it through the stopper.

Pass the end of the shoulder strap through

the hole on the other side of the stopper.

Pull the other side of the

shoulder strap and then check

that it will not come out.

• Perform steps 1 to 4 and then attach

the other side of the shoulder strap.

Note

•

Attach the shoulder strap so that the “LUMIX” LOGO is on the outside.

• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.

– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.

– It may result in injury or accident.

• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.

– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 20 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Charging the Battery

∫ About batteries that you can use with this unit

The battery that can be used with this unit is DMW-BLB13PP.

•

Use the dedicated charger and battery.

• The camera has a function for distinguishing batteries which can be used safely. The

dedicated battery (DMW-BLB13PP) supports this function. The only batteries suitable

for use with this unit are genuine Panasonic products and batteries manufactured by

other companies and certified by Panasonic. (Batteries which do not support this

function cannot be used). Panasonic cannot in any way guarantee the quality,

performance or safety of batteries which have been manufactured by other companies

and are not genuine Panasonic products.

∫ Charging

•

The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use.

• Charge the battery with the charger indoors.

• Charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC to 30 oC (50 oF to 86 oF). (The battery

temperature should also be the same.)

It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the

genuine product are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these

battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the

requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these

battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not

liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit

battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we would recommend that a

genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.

Connect the AC cable.

• The battery cannot be charged when the DC cable

(DMW-DCC3; optional) is connected to the AC adaptor.

Attach the battery with attention to the

direction of the battery.

• Disconnect the charger from the electrical socket and

detach the battery after charging is completed.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 21 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

∫ About the [CHARGE] indicator

•

When the [CHARGE] indicator flashes

–The battery temperature is too high or too low. Please charge the battery again in a

temperature between 10 oC to 30 oC (50 oF to 86 oF).

–The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty. In this case, wipe them with a dry cloth.

∫ Charging time

•

The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.

The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used. The charging

time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been used for a

long time may be longer than normal.

Charging time and number of recordable pictures with the optional battery pack

(DMW-BLB13PP) are the same as above.

∫ Battery indication

The battery indication is displayed on the screen.

[It does not appear when you use the camera with the AC adaptor (P161) connected.]

•

The indication turns red and blinks if the remaining battery power is exhausted. (The status

indicator also blinks) Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged battery.

Note

•

Do not use any other AC cables except the supplied one.

• The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera also

becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

• The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not

recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully

charged. (Since characteristic swelling may occur.)

• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.

Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the

resulting heat generated.

The [CHARGE]

indicator turns on: The [CHARGE] indicator

A is turned on and charging will start.

The [CHARGE]

indicator turns off: The [CHARGE] indicator

A of the charger will turn off once the

charging has completed without any problem.

Charging time Approx. 155 min

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 22 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

∫ Recording still pictures (when using the LCD monitor) (By CIPA standard in

Program AE Mode)

∫ Recording still pictures (when using the viewfinder) (By CIPA standard in

Program AE Mode)

Recording conditions by CIPA standard

•

CIPA is an abbreviation of [Camera & Imaging Products Association].

• Temperature: 23 oC (73.4 oF)/Humidity: 50% when LCD monitor is on.

• Using a Panasonic SD Memory Card (2 GB).

• Using the supplied battery.

• Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on.

• Recording once every 30 seconds with full flash every second recording.

• Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery

decreases.

The number of recordable pictures varies depending on the recording interval time.

If the recording interval time becomes longer, the number of recordable pictures

decreases. [For example, if you were to take one picture every two minutes, then the

number of pictures would be reduced to approximately one-quarter of the number

of pictures given above (based upon one picture taken every 30 seconds).]

∫ Playback (when using the LCD monitor)

Note

•

The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the

environment and the operating conditions.

For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable

pictures is reduced.

– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.

– When using [AUTO POWER LCD] or [POWER LCD] (P32).

– When flash is used repeatedly.

• When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even after properly charging

the battery, the life of the battery may have expired. Buy a new battery.

Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures

When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is

used

Number of recordable

pictures

Approx. 380 pictures

Recording time Approx. 190 min

When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is

used

Number of recordable

pictures

Approx. 410 pictures

Recording time Approx. 205 min

When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is

used

Playback time Approx. 350 min

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 23 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Inserting and Removing the Card (optional)/the

Battery

• Check that this unit is turned off.

• Close the flash.

• We recommend using a Panasonic card.

Slide the release lever in the direction of

the arrow and open the card/battery

door.

• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries

(DMW-BLB13PP).

• If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee

the quality of this product.

Battery: Insert until it is locked by the

lever A being careful about the direction

you insert it. Pull the lever A in the

direction of the arrow to remove the

battery.

Card: Push it fully until it clicks being

careful about the direction you insert it.

To remove the card, push the card until it

clicks, then pull the card out upright.

B:Do not touch the connection terminals of the

card.

•

The card may be damaged if it is not fully inserted.

1:Close the card/battery door.

2:Slide the release lever in the direction

of the arrow.

• If the card/battery door cannot be completely

closed, remove the card, check its direction and

then insert it again.

Note

•

Remove the battery after use.

• Do not remove the battery while the power is on as the settings on the camera may not be

stored properly.

• The supplied battery is designed only for the camera. Do not use it with any other equipment.

• The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after being charged.

• Before removing the card or battery, turn the camera off, and wait until the status indicator has

gone off completely. (Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself

may be damaged or the recorded pictures may be lost.)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 24 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

About the Card

Access to the card

The access indication lights red when pictures are being recorded

on the card.

The following cards which conform to the SD video standard can be used with this unit.

(These cards are indicated as card in the text.)

•

Only cards bearing the SDHC logo (indicating that the card conforms to SD video standards)

may be used as 4 GB to 32 GB cards.

• Only cards bearing the SDXC logo (indicating that the card conforms to SD video standards)

may be used as 48 GB to 64 GB cards.

• Use a card with SD Speed Class

with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures.

¢ SD Speed Class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing.

• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

Note

•

Do not turn off the power or remove the battery, card, or the DC cable (DMW-DCC3;

optional) (when the AC adaptor is in use), while the access indicator is lit, while writing,

reading, or deleting the picture, formatting (P35), etc. Also, do not apply vibration,

shock, or static electricity to the unit.

The card or the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate

normally.

If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation

again.

• Write-Protect switch A provided (When this switch is set to the [LOCK] position,

no further data writing, deletion or formatting is possible. The ability to write, delete

and format data is restored when the switch is returned to its original position.)

• The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves, static

electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing

important data on a PC etc.

• Do not format the card on your PC or other equipment. Format it on the camera

only to ensure proper operation. (P35)

• Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

Card

Type of card which can be

used with this unit

Remarks

SD Memory Card

(8 MB to 2 GB)

• SDHC Memory Card can be used with SDHC Memory Card

or SDXC Memory Card compatible equipment.

• SDXC Memory Card can only be used with SDXC Memory

Card compatible equipment.

• Check that the PC and other equipment are compatible when

using the SDXC Memory Cards.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

SDHC Memory Card

(4 GB to 32 GB)

SDXC Memory Card

(48 GB to 64 GB)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 25 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Setting Date/Time (Clock Set)

• The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.

Turn the camera on.

A [MENU/SET] button

Press [MENU/SET].

Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month,

day, hour, minute, display sequence or time

display format), and press 3/4 to set.

A: Time at the home area

B: Time at the travel destination (P112)

‚: Cancel without setting the clock.

•

Select either [24HRS] or [AM/PM] for the time display

format.

• AM/PM is displayed when [AM/PM] is selected.

• When [AM/PM] is selected as the time display format, midnight is displayed as

AM 12:00 and noon is displayed as PM 12:00. This display format is common in the US

and elsewhere.

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

Press [MENU/SET].

• Press [‚] to return to the settings screen.

• Turn the camera off after finishing setting the clock. Then turn it on and check that the

clock setting is correct.

• When [MENU/SET] has been pressed to complete the settings without the clock having

been set, set the clock correctly by following the

“Changing the clock setting” procedure.

Select [CLOCK SET] in the [SETUP] menu, and press 1. (P28)

•

It can be changed in steps 3, 4 and 5 to set the clock.

• The clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even

without the battery. (Leave the charged battery in the unit for 24 hours to charge the

built-in battery.)

Changing the clock setting

OFF

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 26 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Note

•

The clock is displayed when [DISPLAY] is pressed several times during recording.

• You can set the year from 2000 to 2099.

• If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you stamp the date on the

pictures with [TEXT STAMP] (P136) or order a photo studio to print the pictures.

• If the clock is set, the correct date can be printed even if the date is not displayed on the screen

of the camera.

Setting the Menu

This camera offers menu selections that allow you to customize its operation to maximize

your picture taking experience.

In particular, the [SETUP] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s

clock and power. Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera.

Note

•

There are functions that cannot be set or used depending on the modes or menu settings being

used on the camera due to the specifications.

! [REC] Mode menu (P113 to 122) [SETUP] menu (P31 to 35)

• This menu lets you

set the aspect ratio,

number of pixels and

other aspects of the

pictures you are

recording.

• This menu lets you

perform the clock

settings, select the

operating beep tone

settings and set

other settings which

make it easier for

you to operate the camera.

[MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu

(P122 to 123)

[MY MENU]

• This menu lets you

set the setting for

motion pictures such

as recording quality.

–

The [MOTION PICTURE]

Mode menu is only

displayed when in Motion

Picture Mode.

• Up to 5 menu items

used recently can be

memorized. Items

used a lot can be

recalled easily.

[CUSTOM] menu (P123 to 128) ( [PLAYBACK] Mode menu (P131 to 145)

• Operation of the unit,

such as displaying of

the screen and

button operations,

can be set up

according to your

preferences. Also, it

is possible to register the modified settings.

• This menu lets you

set the Protection,

Cropping or Print

Settings, etc. of

recorded pictures.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 27 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

This section describes how to select the [REC] Mode menu settings, and the same setting

procedure can be used for the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu, [CUSTOM] menu,

[SETUP] menu, [MY MENU] menu and [PLAYBACK] Mode menu as well.

•

If you set [MENU RESUME] (P128) in the [CUSTOM] menu to [ON], the screen shows the last

selected menu item when the camera was turned off.

It is set to [ON] at the time of purchase.

Example: Setting [I.EXPOSURE] from [OFF] to [HIGH] in the Program AE Mode

Setting menu items

Turn the camera on.

A [MENU/SET] button

B Mode dial

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu.

C Menu toggle icon

D Menu item

E Settings

Switching to other menus

e.g.: Switching to the [SETUP] menu

1 Press 2.

2 Press 4 or rotate the rear dial

to select the [SETUP] menu icon [ ].

3 Press 1 or the rear dial.

•

Select a menu item next and set it.

OFF

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 28 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Press 3/4 or rotate the rear dial to select

[I.EXPOSURE].

• Select the item at the very bottom, and press 4 or

rotate the rear dial right to move to the next screen.

Press 1 or the rear dial.

• Depending on the item, its setting may not appear or it

may be displayed in a different way.

Press 3/4 or rotate the rear dial to select

[HIGH].

Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial to set.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 29 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Setting the Quick Menu

By using the Quick Menu, some of the menu settings can be easily found.

•

The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display

style the camera is in.

Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu in recording

status.

Press 3/4/2/1 or rotate the rear dial to select the menu item and

the setting.

• Setup method is different as following depending on the displayed screen during

recording. Refer to P54 about the displayed screen.

[ ] (LCD monitor style)

•

Proceed to step 4 below after selecting the item and settings.

[ ] (Finder style)

•

Select the item, press the rear dial, and then select the setting.

Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial to set the menu.

Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick Menu.

PPP

AWB

STDSTDSTD

−

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFS

AWB

STDSTDSTD

−

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFS

AWB

STDSTDSTD

−

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFS

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 30 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Perform these settings if you need to.

About the Setup Menu

[CLOCK SET], [ECONOMY] and [AUTO REVIEW] are important items. Check their

settings before using them.

•

In the Intelligent Auto Mode, only [CLOCK SET], [WORLD TIME], [BEEP], [LCD MODE] and

[LANGUAGE] can be set.

For details on how to select the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P28.

•

Refer to P26 for details.

• Refer to P112 for details.

• Refer to P110 for details.

• When you connect the camera to a TV, the volume of the TV speakers does not change.

• Adjust the brightness of the screen with 3/4, contrast and saturation

with 2/1 or the rear dial.

• When [DISPLAY] is pressed in screen shown right, it will switch to the

color adjustment screen. Adjust between red and green with 3/4, or

between orange and blue with 2/1 or the rear dial.

Press [MENU/SET] to return to the LCD adjustment screen.

• It will adjust the LCD monitor when the LCD monitor is in use, and the

viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use.

U [CLOCK SET] Setting Date/Time.

[WORLD TIME]

Set the time in your home area and travel destination.

“ [DESTINATION]:

Travel destination area

– [HOME]:

Your home area

— [TRAVEL DATE]

Set the departure date and the return date of the vacation.

[TRAVEL SETUP]

[OFF]/[SET]

[LOCATION]

[OFF]/[SET]

[BEEP]

Set the volume of the focus confirmation beep, the self-timer beep

and the alarm beep.

[s] (Muted)

[t] (Low)

[u] (High)

u [VOLUME]

Adjust the volume of the speaker to any of 7 levels.

[MONITOR]/

[VIEWFINDER]

Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the LCD monitor/viewfinder

is adjusted.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 31 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

• The brightness of the pictures displayed on the LCD monitor is increased so some subjects

may appear differently from actuality on the LCD monitor. However, this does not affect the

recorded pictures.

• The LCD monitor automatically returns to normal brightness after 30 seconds when recording

in Power LCD Mode. Press any button to make the LCD monitor bright again.

• If the screen is difficult to see because of light from the sun etc. shining on it, use your hand or

another object to block the light.

• The number of recordable pictures decreases in Auto Power LCD and Power LCD Modes.

• [AUTO POWER LCD] cannot be selected when playing back pictures.

• [AUTO POWER LCD] is disabled during motion picture recording.

• When the menu screen is displayed in a dark environment etc., the LCD monitor becomes

darker even if [LCD MODE] is set to [OFF].

• Press the shutter button halfway or turn the camera off and on to cancel [SLEEP MODE].

• [SLEEP MODE] is set to [5MIN.] in the Intelligent Auto Mode.

• [SLEEP MODE] is fixed to [2MIN.] when [AUTO LCD OFF] is set to [15SEC.] or [30SEC.].

• Press any button to turn on the LCD monitor again.

• [SLEEP MODE] does not work in the following cases.

– When using the AC adaptor

– When connecting to a PC or a printer

– When recording or playing back motion pictures

– During a slide show

[LCD MODE]

These menu settings make it easier to see the LCD monitor when

you are in bright places.

[OFF]

„ [AUTO POWER LCD]:

The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright

it is around the camera.

… [POWER LCD]:

The LCD monitor becomes brighter and easier to see even when

taking pictures outdoors.

q [ECONOMY]

You can conserve the battery life by setting these menus.

Also, it will turn off the LCD monitor automatically when not in use

to prevent discharge of the battery.

p [SLEEP MODE]:

The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been

used for the time selected on the setting.

[OFF]/[1MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[5MIN.]/[10MIN.]

[AUTO LCD OFF]:

The LCD monitor is automatically turned off if the camera has not

been used for the time selected on the setting.

[OFF]/[15SEC.]/[30SEC.]

LCD

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 32 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

• If it is set to [HOLD] when the camera is set to [ ] (P43) or [ ] (P68), switching of the

playback screen display (P50) or enlargement by rotating the rear dial is possible during Auto

Review.

• The Auto Review function is activated regardless of its setting when set to [H] for Burst Mode

(P64), for Auto Bracket (P66) and for still pictures with audio (P122). (Will not hold) Also, you

cannot set the Auto Review function.

• If [HIGHLIGHT] (P124) is set to [ON], white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white

when the Auto Review function is activated.

• [AUTO REVIEW] does not work during Burst Mode when set to [M] or [L] or during recording

motion pictures.

• When [AUTO REGISTRATION] in [FACE RECOG.] (P104) is set to [ON], [AUTO REVIEW] can

only be set to [3SEC.] or [5SEC.].

• When [PC] is selected, the camera is connected via the “USB Mass Storage” communication

system.

• When [PictBridge(PTP)] is selected, the camera is connected via the “PTP (Picture Transfer

Protocol)” communication system.

• This will operate when the AV cable or HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected.

• This will work when the AV cable is connected.

o [AUTO REVIEW]

Set the length of time that the picture is displayed after taking it.

[OFF]/[1SEC.]/[3SEC.]/[5SEC.]

[HOLD]:

The pictures are displayed until shutter button is pressed halfway.

x [USB MODE]

Select the USB communication system after or before connecting

the camera to your PC or your printer with the USB connection

cable (supplied).

y [SELECT ON CONNECTION]:

Select either [PC] or [PictBridge(PTP)] if you connected the

camera to a PC or a printer supporting PictBridge.

{ [PictBridge(PTP)]:

Set after or before connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.

z [PC]:

Set after or before connecting to a PC.

| [VIDEO OUT]

Set to match the color television system in each country.

[NTSC]: Video output is set to NTSC system.

[PAL]: Video output is set to PAL system.

[TV ASPECT]

Set to match the type of TV.

[W]: When connecting to a 16:9 screen TV.

[X]: When connecting to a 4:3 screen TV.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 33 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

¢1 When [VIDEO OUT] is set to [PAL]

¢2 When [VIDEO OUT] is set to [NTSC]

• Interlace method/progressive method

i= interlace scanning is scanning the screen with half of the effective scanning lines every

1/60 seconds, where p= progressive scanning is a high density image signal that is scanning

the screen with all the effective scanning lines every 1/60 seconds.

The [HDMI] terminal on this unit is compatible with high-definition output [1080i]. It is necessary

to have a compatible TV to enjoy progressive and high-definition images.

• If the images are not output on the TV when the setting is [AUTO], match with the image format

your TV can display, and select the number of effective scanning lines. (Please read the

operating instructions for the TV.)

• This will work when the HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected.

• Refer to P147 for details.

• This will work when the HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected.

• Refer to P149 for details.

[HDMI MODE]

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the

HDMI compatible high-definition TV connected with this unit using

the HDMI mini cable (optional).

[AUTO]:

The output resolution is automatically set based on the

information from the connected TV.

[1080i]:

The interlace method with 1080 available scan lines is used for

output.

[720p]:

The progressive method with 720 available scan lines is used for

output.

[576p]

/[480p]

The progressive method with 576

/480

available scan lines is

used for output.

[VIERA Link]

Setup so this unit can be controlled by the remote control of the

VIERA equipment by automatically coupling this unit with the VIERA

Link compatible equipment using HDMI mini cable (optional).

[OFF]: Operation is performed with the buttons on this unit.

[ON]: Remote control operation of the VIERA Link

compatible equipment is enabled. (Not all operations

are possible)

Button operation of the main unit will be limited.

} [SCENE MENU]

Set the screen that is displayed when the mode dial is set to ,

, , , and .

[OFF]: The recording screen in the currently selected

Advanced Scene Mode (P88) or Scene Mode (P93)

appears.

[AUTO]: The Advanced Scene Mode or Scene Mode menu

screen appears.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 34 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

• If you set a different language by mistake, select [~] from the menu icons to set the desired

language.

• [–. –] is displayed as the lens firmware when the lens is not mounted.

• The folder number is updated and the file number starts from 0001. (P153)

• A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.

When the folder number reaches 999, the number cannot be reset. We recommend formatting

the card (P35) after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere.

• To reset the folder number to 100, format the card first and then use this function to reset the

file number.

A reset screen for the folder number will then appear. Select [YES] to reset the folder number.

• When the [REC] Mode settings are reset, data registered with [FACE RECOG.] will also be

reset.

• When [SETUP]/[CUSTOM] menu settings are reset, the following settings are also reset. In

addition, [FAVORITE] (P134) in [PLAYBACK] Mode menu is set to [OFF], and [ROTATE DISP.]

(P142) is set to [ON].

– The birthday and name settings for [BABY1]/[BABY2] (P94) and [PET] (P95) in Scene Mode.

– The settings of [TRAVEL DATE] (P110) (departure date, return date, location)

– The [WORLD TIME] (P112) setting.

• The folder number and the clock setting are not changed.

• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P161) when formatting. Do not

turn the camera off during formatting.

• If the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, format it on the camera again.

• If the card cannot be formatted, please try another card before contacting Panasonic or our

Service Center.

~ [LANGUAGE]

Set the language displayed on the screen.

[ENGLISH]/[FRANÇAIS]/[ESPAÑOL]/[PORTUGUÊS]

[VERSION DISP.]

This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be

checked.

v [NO.RESET] Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

w [RESET]

The [REC] or [SETUP]/[CUSTOM] menu settings are reset to the

initial settings.

[FORMAT]

The card is formatted.

Formatting permanently deletes all data on your memory

card. Please be sure all pictures and motion pictures are

saved elsewhere before using this feature.

For Canadian assistance, please call:

1-800-99-LUMIX (1-800-995-8649) or

send e-mail to: lumixconcierge@ca.panasonic.com

For USA and Puerto Rico assistance, please call:

1-800-211-PANA(7262) or, contact us via the web at:

http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 35 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

Holding and using Your Camera

• Do not cover the flash, the AF Assist Lamp

A or the microphone B with your fingers

or other objects.

• Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep

your arms still at your side and stand with your

feet slightly apart.

• Be careful not to move the camera when you

press the shutter button.

• Do not touch the front of the lens. (P167)

• When taking pictures, make sure your footing

is stable and there is no danger of colliding

with another person, an object etc.

Pictures recorded with the camera held vertically are played back vertically (rotated). (Only

when [ROTATE DISP.] (P142) is set to [ON])

•

The Direction Detection Function may not operate correctly if recording is performed with the

camera aimed up or down.

• Motion pictures taken with the camera held vertically are not displayed vertically.

• You can only use the Direction Detection Function when using a compatible lens.

(Refer to the catalogue, website etc. for compatible lenses.)

Press [LVF/LCD] to switch the

monitor screen.

A Viewfinder

B LCD monitor

C [LVF/LCD] button

D Eye cup

• You can switch between LCD (LCD monitor)

display and LVF (viewfinder) display.

• Switching via the [LVF/LCD] button will be

maintained even when the power of the digital camera is turned [OFF].

Tips for taking good pictures

Direction Detection Function

Switching the LCD monitor/Viewfinder

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 36 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

∫ Diopter adjustment

Adjust the diopter to suit your vision so that

you can see the viewfinder clearly.

Look at the display on the viewfinder and

rotate the diopter adjustment dial to

where the screen is clearest.

Note

•

The eye cup cannot be removed. Please read

P166 for the cleaning and care.

Mode switching

Selecting the [REC] Mode

∫ To select Intelligent Auto Mode

Press [¦] A.

• [¦] button will light up when it is switched to Intelligent Auto Mode.

∫ To select a [REC] Mode with the mode dial

Switching the mode by rotating the mode dial.

Align a desired mode with part B.

•

Rotate the mode dial slowly to adjust to each mode. (The mode dial

rotates 360 o)

• The Recording Mode selected by the mode dial is disabled while the [¦]

button is lit.

Intelligent Auto Mode (P39)

The subjects are recorded using settings automatically selected by the camera.

AWBAWBAWB

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFSAFSAFS

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 37 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Preparation

∫ List of [REC] Modes

∫ Advanced Scene Mode

Program AE Mode (P43)

The subjects are recorded using your own settings.

Aperture-Priority AE Mode (P84)

The shutter speed is automatically determined by the aperture value you set.

Shutter-Priority AE Mode (P84)

The aperture value is automatically determined by the shutter speed you set.

Manual Exposure Mode (P85)

The exposure is adjusted by the aperture value and the shutter speed which are

manually adjusted.

Custom Mode (P99)

Use this mode to take pictures with previously registered settings.

Motion Picture Mode (P100)

This mode allows you to record motion pictures with audio.

Scene Mode (P93)

This allows you to take pictures that match the scene being recorded.

My Color Mode (P96)

Use this mode to check coloring effects, select a color mode from among eight color

modes, and then take pictures.

Portrait Mode (P89)

Use this mode to take pictures of people.

Scenery Mode (P90)

Use this mode to take pictures of scenery.

Sports Mode (P90)

Use this mode to take pictures of sporting events, etc.

Close-up Mode (P91)

Use this mode to take pictures of a close-by subject.

Night portrait Mode (P92)

Use this mode to take pictures of night scenes and people against night time scenery.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 38 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

[REC] Mode: ñ

Basic

Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function

(ñ: Intelligent Auto Mode)

The camera will set the most appropriate settings to match the subject and the recording

conditions so we recommend this mode for beginners or those who want to leave the

settings to the camera and take pictures easily.

•

The following functions are activated automatically.

–Scene detection/[RED-EYE REMOVAL]/Face Detection/Intelligent ISO sensitivity control/

[I.EXPOSURE]/[LONG SHTR NR]/Quick AF/[FOCUS PRIORITY]/Backlight Compensation/

[I.RESOLUTION]

Press [¦] A.

• [¦] button will light up when it is switched to Intelligent Auto Mode.

[

¦] button is turned off during recording to prevent the light reflecting on glass or

similar, but this is not a malfunction.

• [¦] button is turned off when it is pressed again, and it will be set to the [REC] Modes

selected by the mode dial.

• When the mode dial is set to [ ], motion pictures will reflect the setting of Intelligent

Auto Mode. (P101)

Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].

• Refer to

P44

for [AFS] and [AFC].

• The status indicator 3 lights when you turn this

unit on 2. (1: Shutter button)

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

• The focus indication 1 (green) lights when the subject

is focused.

• The AF area 2 is displayed around the subject’s face

by the Face Detection Function. In other cases, it is

displayed at the point on the subject which is in focus.

• The focus indication blinks when the subject is not

focused. In this case, a picture is not taken. Press the

shutter button halfway to focus on the subject again.

•

The focus range is different depending on the lens

used.

–When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in

DMC-G10K is used: 0.3 m (0.99 feet) to

OFF

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 39 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

∫ When taking pictures using the flash (P57)

•

Open the flash when the flash is to be used.

• [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] is set depending on the type of subject and brightness.

• When [ ] or [ ] is displayed, the Digital Red-Eye correction is turned on.

• Shutter speed will be slow when using [ ] or [ ].

• Flash modes cannot be switched using the menu in the Intelligent Auto Mode.

∫ When taking pictures using the zoom (P47)

∫ To adjust the exposure and take pictures at times when the image appears too

dark (P63)

∫ When taking pictures with Manual Focus (P73)

∫ When recording motion pictures (P100)

∫ To take pictures using the Face Recognition function (which stores faces of

frequent subjects with information such as their names and birthdays) (P104)

When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon of the scene concerned is

displayed in blue for 2 seconds, after which its color changes to the usual red.

•

[¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard settings are set.

• When [ ],[ ] or [ ] is selected, the camera automatically detects a person’s face, and it will

adjust the focus and exposure. (Face Detection) (P70)

• If a tripod is used, for instance, and the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal when

the Scene Mode has been identified as [ ], the shutter speed will be slower than normal. Take

care not to move the camera while taking pictures.

• An optimum scene for the specified subject will be chosen when set to AF Tracking (P41).

• Depending on the scene detected, camera will automatically adjust the setting of the

[I.RESOLUTION] (P118). [I.RESOLUTION] cannot be set via the [REC] Mode menu.

• When [FACE RECOG.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered face is detected, [R]

is displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ].

¢ When [FACE RECOG.] is set to [ON], [ ] will be displayed for birthdays of registered faces

already set only when the face of a person 3 years old or younger is detected.

Press the shutter button fully (push it in

further), and take the picture.

• In Intelligent Auto Mode, [FOCUS PRIORITY] (P126) is fixed to [ON]. This means you

cannot take pictures until the subject is in focus.

• The access indication (P25) lights red when pictures are being recorded on the card.

Scene detection

[i-PORTRAIT]

[i-SCENERY]

[i-MACRO]

[i-NIGHT PORTRAIT]

•

Only when [ ] is selected

[i-NIGHT SCENERY]

[i-SUNSET]

[i-BABY]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 40 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

Note

•

Due to conditions such as the ones below, a different scene may be identified for the same subject.

– Subject conditions: When the face is bright or dark, the size of the subject, the color of the

subject, the distance to the subject, the contrast of the subject, when the subject is moving

– Recording conditions: Sunset, sunrise, under low brightness conditions, when the camera is

shaken, when zoom is used

• To take pictures in an intended scene, it is recommended that you take pictures in the

appropriate Recording Mode.

• The Backlight Compensation

–

Backlight refers to when light comes from the back of a subject. In this case, the subject will

become dark, so this function compensates the backlight by brightening the whole of the

picture automatically. Backlight compensation is automatically applied in Intelligent Auto Mode.

It is possible to set the focus and exposure to the specified subject. Focus and exposure

will keep following the subject automatically even if it moves.

1 Press 2.

•

[ ] is displayed in the lower left of the screen.

• AF Tracking frame is displayed in the center of the

screen.

• Press 2 again to cancel.

2 Place the subject in the Tracking frame, and

press the shutter button halfway to lock the subject.

•

AF area will turn green when the camera detects the subject.

• AF Tracking frame will turn yellow when you release the shutter button and

the optimum scene for the locked subject will be identified.

• Press 2 to cancel.

Note

•

[FACE RECOG.] does not work during AF Tracking.

• Please read the Note regarding the AF Tracking on P71.

• Only the following functions can be set in this mode.

[REC] Mode menu

– [ASPECT RATIO] (P113)/[PICTURE SIZE] (P114)/[QUALITY] (P115)/[FACE RECOG.]

(P115)/

[STABILIZER]

¢1

(P116)

¢1It cannot be set to [MODE3].

[MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu

– [REC QUALITY]

¢2

(P102)/[CONTINUOUS AF] (P123)/[WIND CUT] (P123)

¢2[ ] cannot be set.

[CUSTOM] menu

– [GUIDE LINE] (P124)

[SETUP] menu

– [CLOCK SET]/[WORLD TIME]/[BEEP]/[LCD MODE]/[LANGUAGE]

• Use the Quick Menu (P30) to set the following functions:

– [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in [FILM MODE] (P81)

– [ ] and [ ] in [SELF-TIMER]

¢3

(P68)

¢3It will be reset to [ ] when the Intelligent Auto Mode is canceled or when the power is

switched [ON]/[OFF].

AF Tracking Function

Settings in Intelligent Auto Mode

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 41 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

• The settings of the following items are fixed.

¢4 It will be set to Multi Auto Focus Mode for motion pictures when a face cannot be detected

while recording motion pictures.

¢5 The setting is fixed to [AUTO] when recording motion pictures.

• The following functions cannot be used.

– [AUTO LCD OFF] of [ECONOMY]/AF/AE lock/White Balance fine adjustment/White Balance

Bracket/Multi Film Bracket/Flash output adjustment/[ISO LIMIT SET]/[EX. OPT. ZOOM]/

[DIGITAL ZOOM]/[AUDIO REC.]/[HIGHLIGHT]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF/AE LOCK HOLD]/

[DIRECT AF AREA]/[SHOOT W/O LENS]

• The other items on the [SETUP] menu and [CUSTOM] menu can be set in a mode such as the

Program AE Mode. What is set will be reflected in the Intelligent Auto Mode.

Item Settings

[ECONOMY]

([SLEEP MODE]) (P32)

[5MIN.]

Flash (P57) /Œ

[FLASH SYNCHRO] (P62) [1ST]

[BURST RATE] (P64) [H] (High speed)

[AUTO BRACKET] (P66) [STEP]

: [3•1/3]

[SEQUENCE]: [0/`/_]

[AF MODE] (P69) š (Set to [ ]

¢4

when a face cannot be detected)

[WHITE BALANCE] (P76) [AWB]

[SENSITIVITY] (P79)

¢5

(Intelligent ISO)

(The maximum ISO sensitivity: ISO800)

[METERING MODE]

(P118)

[RED-EYE REMOVAL]

(P117)

[ON]

[I.EXPOSURE] (P119) [STANDARD]

[LONG SHTR NR] (P120) [ON]

[COLOR SPACE] (P121) [sRGB]

[PRE AF] (P125)

[FOCUS PRIORITY]

(P126)

[ON]

[AF ASSIST LAMP] (P126) [ON]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 42 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

[REC] Mode: ³

Taking Pictures with Your Favorite Settings

( : Program AE Mode)

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the

brightness of the subject.

You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in the [REC]

menu.

•

Set the drive mode lever to [ ].

Set the mode dial to [ ].

• To change the setting while taking pictures, refer to

“Using the [REC] Mode Menu” (P113) or “Using the

[CUSTOM] Menu

” (P123).

Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].

• Refer to

P44

for [AFS] and [AFC].

∫ To adjust the exposure and take pictures at times when the image appears too

dark (P63)

∫ To adjust the colors and take pictures at times when the image appears too red

(P76)

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

• The focus indication (green) lights when the subject is

focused.

• The focus indication blinks when the subject is not

focused. In this case, a picture is not taken. Press the

shutter button halfway to focus on the subject again.

• The focus range is different depending on the lens

used.

–When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in

DMC-G10K is used: 0.3 m (0.99 feet) to

•

If the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ISO100] and the aperture value is set to F3.5 (when the

14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is attached), the shutter speed is

automatically set between about 30 seconds and 1/4000th of a second.

Press the halfway pressed shutter button

fully to take a picture.

• A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into focus.

• If you want to press the shutter button fully to take a picture even when the subject is

not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM] menu to [OFF]. (P126)

• The access indication lights (P25) red when pictures are being recorded on the card.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 43 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

Set the focus mode dial to [AFS].

• “AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. The focus is adjusted

when you press the shutter button halfway.

• Normally use the [AFS].

• Focus during the Burst Mode is fixed at the first picture. Refer to P64 for

details.

This mode allows you to compose a picture more easily by continuously focusing on the

movement of the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

When taking pictures of a moving subject, the camera predicts the movement of the

subject and focuses on it. (motion prediction)

•

[AFC] will not operate with certain lenses. For details, refer to page 16.

Set the focus mode dial to [AFC].

• “AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. The camera is

continuously focusing on the subject while the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

• It may take time to focus on the subject if you rotate the zoom ring from

Wide to Tele or suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a

nearby one.

• Focusing will continue even after the shutter button is pressed during the

Burst Mode. Refer to P64 for details.

• Set the [PRE AF] of [CUSTOM] menu item (P125) when you would like to set the focus before

pressing the shutter button halfway.

• Focus sound will not be heard in [AFC] even if the subject comes into focus. Also, AF area will

not be displayed if the AF Mode is set to [ ].

• When brightness is not enough, the mode will turn to [AFS] and in that case the AF area will be

displayed and the focus sound will beep when the subject comes into focus.

• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.

Set the focus mode dial to [MF].

• For details, refer to P73.

Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFC/MF)

Fix the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway (AFS)

Continuously focusing on a subject (AFC)

Take a picture with Manual Focus (MF)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 44 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

Align the subject to the screen, and then press the shutter button halfway.

A Focus indication

B AF area (normal)

C AF area (when using the Digital Zoom or when it is dark)

D Aperture value

¢1

E Shutter speed

¢1

F ISO sensitivity

¢1

It will flash in red when appropriate exposure is not achieved.

(Except when flash is activated)

¢2 Sound volume can be set in [BEEP] (P31).

• When the AF Mode is set to [ ], and multiple AF areas (up to 23 areas) have turned on, all the

AF areas that have turned on are focused. If you would like to take a picture focused on a

certain area, switch the AF Mode to [Ø]. (P69)

• Focus sound will not beep if the Focus Mode is set to [AFC]. Also, the AF area will not be

displayed if the AF Mode is set to [ ].

If the subject is not in the center of composition when the AF Mode is set to [Ø], it is

possible to move the AF area.

(P72)

∫ Take picture with different Focus Modes depending on the subject (P69)

∫ Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus

•

Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast

• When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects

• When it is dark or when jitter occurs

• When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near

subjects

When the jitter alert [ ] appears, use [STABILIZER] (P116), a tripod, the self-timer

(P68) or the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional)

(P160).

•

Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the

moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen. We recommend

using a tripod.

– Slow Sync.

– Slow Sync./Red-Eye Reduction

– [NIGHT PORTRAIT] and [NIGHT SCENERY] in the Advanced Scene Mode (P88)

– [PARTY] in Scene Mode (P94)

– When you set to a slow shutter speed

Focusing

Focus

When the subject is

focused

When the subject

is not focused

Focus indication On Blinks

AF area Green

—

Sound

¢2

Beeps 2 times

—

When the subject is not in focus

Preventing jitter (camera shake)

E F

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 45 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

In Program AE Mode, you can change the preset aperture

value and shutter speed without changing the exposure.

This is called Program Shift.

You can make the background more blurred by

decreasing the aperture value or record a moving subject

more dynamically by slowing the shutter speed when

taking a picture in Program AE Mode.

1 Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter

speed value on the screen.

2 While the values are displayed (about 10 seconds), perform the Program Shift

by rotating the rear dial.

•

It will switch between Program Shift operation and Exposure Compensation operation (P63)

every time the rear dial is pressed while the values are displayed.

• Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER] B. (P127)

• The Program Shift indication A appears on the screen when Program Shift is activated.

• To cancel Program Shift, turn the camera off or rotate the rear dial until the Program Shift

indication disappears.

∫ Example of Program Shift

(When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is used)

Note

•

If the exposure is not adequate when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture value

and shutter speed turn red and blink.

• Program Shift is canceled and the camera returns to normal Program AE Mode if more than

10 seconds pass after Program Shift is activated. However, the Program Shift setting is

memorized.

• Depending on the brightness of the subject, Program Shift may not be activated.

• Program Shift is not possible when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ ].

Program Shift

(A): Aperture value

(B): Shutter speed

1 Program Shift amount

2 Program Shift line chart

3 Program Shift limit

A B

(A)

(B)

4 2 1 1

125

250

500

1000

2000

4000

(Ev)

2.8

5.6

1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 46 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures with the Zoom

You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record

landscapes in wide angle.

To make subjects appear closer use (Tele)

Rotate the zoom ring towards Tele. (P13)

To make subjects appear further away use (Wide)

Rotate the zoom ring towards Wide. (P13)

To enlarge further, set the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] to [ON] or the [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [2k] or

[4k] in the [REC] Mode menu or the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu. Then you can take

larger photos.

When the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (max. 2k) is used in still picture recording, set each image

Aspect Ratio (X/Y/W/ ) to a picture size other than [L].

Using the Optical Zoom/using the Extended Optical Zoom (EZ)/

using the Digital Zoom

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 47 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

∫ Types of zooms

¢1 When a picture size of [S] (3 M), aspect ratio of [X] is selected.

The magnification level differs depending on [PICTURE SIZE] and [ASPECT RATIO] setting.

¢2 When recording quality setting [ ] or [ ] is selected. When recording quality setting

[ ] or [ ] is selected, Extended Optical Zoom factor will change to 4.2.

∫ Extended Optical Zoom mechanism

Example: When it is set to [ ] (equal to 3.1 million pixels), it will take the picture using

the 3.1 million pixels in the center out of the 12 million pixels of the imaging device,

resulting to be more of a telephoto picture.

Note

•

“EZ” is an abbreviation of “Extended Optical Zoom”.

• If you use the zoom function after focusing on the subject, focus on the subject again.

• When using the Digital Zoom, [STABILIZER] may not be effective.

• When using the Digital Zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P68) for taking

pictures.

• The [AF MODE] is fixed to [Ø] when using the Digital Zoom.

• The Extended Optical Zoom cannot be used in the following cases.

– In Intelligent Auto Mode

– When [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• [DIGITAL ZOOM] cannot be used in the following cases.

– In Intelligent Auto Mode

– In Advanced Scene Mode

– In Scene Mode

– When [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

Feature Optical Zoom

Extended Optical Zoom (EZ)

Digital Zoom

Recording

magnification

When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is used

¢1

(when taking still

pictures: 6k)

3.1k

¢2

(when recording

motion pictures: 9.4k)

[2k] (including Extended

Optical Zoom)

when taking still

pictures: 12k

¢1

when recording motion

pictures: 18.7k

¢2

[4k] (including Extended

Optical Zoom)

when taking still

pictures: 24k

¢1

when recording motion

pictures: 37.5k

¢2

Picture

quality

No deterioration No deterioration

The higher the magnification

level, the greater the

deterioration.

Conditions None

Set the [EX. OPT. ZOOM]

(P120) in [REC] Mode

menu or

[MOTION PICTURE]

Mode menu to [ON], and

then when taking still

pictures select number of

recordable pixels with

[] (P114).

[DIGITAL ZOOM] (P120) on

the [REC] Mode menu or

[MOTION PICTURE] Mode

menu is set to [2k] or [4k].

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 48 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

Playing Back Pictures

Press 2/1 to select the picture.

• Speed of picture forwarding/rewinding changes

depending on the playback status.

• If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the pictures in succession.

∫ To finish playback

Press [(] again or press the shutter button halfway.

Note

•

This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system” established

by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” and with Exif

“Exchangeable Image File Format”. Files which do not comply with the DCF standard cannot

be played back.

Press [(].

A [(] button

2: Play back the previous picture

1: Play back the next picture

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 49 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

Press [DISPLAY] to switch the monitor screen.

A [DISPLAY] button

• When the menu screen appears, the [DISPLAY] button is not

activated. During Playback Zoom (P51), while playing back

motion pictures (P130) and during a slide show (P131), you

can only select “Normal display B” or “No display F”.

• Refer to P56 for information about the histogram D.

B Normal display

C Detailed information display

D Histogram display

E Highlight display

F No display

¢ This is displayed if [HIGHLIGHT] (P124) in the [CUSTOM] menu is set to [ON].

Rotate the rear dial left.

1 screen>12 screens>30 screens>Calendar screen

display

A Number of the selected picture and the total number of

recorded pictures

• Rotate the rear dial right to return to the previous screen.

• Pictures are not rotated for display.

• Pictures displayed using [ ] cannot be played back.

∫ To return to Normal Playback

1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture.

•

An icon will be displayed depending on the recorded picture and the settings.

2 Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial.

•

The picture that was selected will appear.

Changing the information displayed on the playback screen

Displaying multiple screens (Multi Playback)

F3.5

1/9

ISO

100

100-0001

303030

STDSTDSTD

F3.5F3.5F3.5

1/91/91/9

AWBAWBAWB

100-0001

F3.5

10:00 DEC. 1.2010

RGB

STANDARD

AFS

100

WBWB

ISOISO

AWB

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 50 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

You can display pictures by recording date.

Note

•

The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected

when the calendar screen is first displayed.

• If there are multiple pictures with the same recording date, the first picture recorded on that day

is displayed.

• You can display the calendar between January 2000 and December 2099.

• If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as January 1st, 2010.

• If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [WORLD TIME], the pictures are

displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback.

Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback)

Rotate the rear dial left to display the

calendar screen.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the date to be played back.

• If there were no pictures recorded during a month, the month is not displayed.

Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial to

display the pictures that were recorded on

the selected date.

• Rotate the rear dial left to return to the calendar

screen display.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press [MENU/SET] or

the rear dial.

• The picture that was selected will appear.

Using the Playback Zoom

Rotate the rear dial right.

1k>2k>4k>8k>16k

•

When you rotate the rear dial left after enlarging the picture,

the magnification becomes lower.

• When you change the magnification, the zoom position

indication A appears for about 1 second, and the position of

the enlarged section can be moved by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• The more a picture is enlarged, the more its quality

deteriorates.

• When you move the position to be displayed, the zoom

position indication appears for about 1 second.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 51 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

∫ Switching the displayed image while maintaining the Playback Zoom

You can switch the displayed image while maintaining the same zoom magnification and

zoom position for the Playback Zoom.

Switch to picture select operation by pressing

the rear dial during Playback Zoom, and select

pictures with 2/1.

• It will switch between picture select operation and move

zoom position operation every time the rear dial is pressed

during Playback Zoom.

Note

•

You can also delete the recording information etc. on the screen during Playback Zoom by

pressing [DISPLAY].

• If you want to save the enlarged picture, use the Cropping function. (P140)

• The Playback Zoom may not operate if pictures have been recorded with other equipment.

• The zoom magnification and the zoom position are canceled when the camera is turned off

(including Sleep Mode).

• The zoom position returns to the center in the following images.

– Images with different aspect ratios

– Images with different numbers of recorded pixels

– Images with a different rotation direction (when [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [ON])

• Playback Zoom cannot be used during motion picture playback or pictures with audio playback.

Deleting Pictures

Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.

Press [(].

To delete a single picture

Select the picture to be deleted, and then

press [‚].

A [(] button

B [DISPLAY] button

C [

‚] button

Press 2 to select [YES] and then press

[MENU/SET].

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 52 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Basic

∫ When [DELETE ALL] has been selected with the [FAVORITE] (P134) setting

The selection screen is displayed again. Select [DELETE ALL] or

[ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ], press 3 to select [YES] and delete the pictures.

([ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] cannot be selected if no pictures have been set as

[FAVORITE].)

Note

•

Do not turn the camera off while deleting (while [‚] is displayed). Use a battery with sufficient

power or the AC adaptor (P161).

• If you press [MENU/SET] while deleting pictures using [DELETE MULTI], [DELETE ALL] or

[ALL DELETE EXCEPT Ü], the deleting will stop halfway.

• Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.

• If pictures do not conform to the DCF standard or are protected (P144), they will not be deleted

even if [DELETE ALL] or [ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] is selected.

To delete multiple pictures (up to 50) or all the pictures

Press [‚].

Press 3/4 to select [DELETE MULTI] or [DELETE ALL] and then

press [MENU/SET].

• [DELETE ALL] > step 5.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and

then press [DISPLAY] to set.

(Repeat this step.)

• [‚] appears on the selected pictures. If [DISPLAY] is

pressed again, the setting is canceled.

Press [MENU/SET].

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET] to set.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 53 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Switching the Display of the LCD Monitor/

Viewfinder

Press [DISPLAY] to change.

A [DISPLAY] button

• When the menu screen appears, the [DISPLAY] button is not

activated.

With the [LCD DISP.STYLE] (P127) of the [CUSTOM] menu, you can choose the

displayed screen on the LCD monitor to display in [ ] (LCD monitor style) or [ ]

(viewfinder style).

When [ ] is set

B Normal display

¢1, 2

C No display

¢1

D Turned off

When [ ] is set

E Normal displayidetailed information

¢1, 2

F Normal display

¢1

G Turned off

Switching the Information Displayed on the recording screen

LCD monitor display

AWBAWBAWB

STDSTDSTD

AUTOAUTOAUTO

−

AFSAFSAFS

−

AWBAWBAWB

AUTOAUTOAUTO

STDSTDSTD

AFSAFSAFS

−

AWBAWBAWB

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFSAFSAFS

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 54 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

With the [LVF DISP.STYLE] (P127) of the [CUSTOM] menu, you can choose the displayed

screen on the viewfinder to display in [ ] (viewfinder style) or [ ] (LCD monitor style).

When [ ] is set

¢1 Guide lines are displayed when the [GUIDE LINE] of the [CUSTOM] menu is set to anything

except [OFF].

It is possible to move the position of the guide line using the Quick Menu when it is set to

[ ]. (P56)

¢2 Histograms are displayed when the [HISTOGRAM] of the [CUSTOM] menu is set to [ON].

It is possible to move the position of the histogram using the Quick Menu. (P57)

It is also possible to display the Exposure Meter by setting the [EXPO.METER] of the

[CUSTOM] menu to [ON]. (P127)

Note

•

In [NIGHT PORTRAIT] (P92), the guide line is gray.

∫ About LCD priority playback

When the [PLAY ON LCD] (P127) in the [CUSTOM] menu is set to [ON], the LCD monitor

is turned on in the following cases.

You can save the time it would take to switch the display to the LCD monitor even when

using the viewfinder to record.

•

When it is switched from recording screen to playback screen

Viewfinder display

A Normal display

¢1

B Normal displayidetailed information

¢1, 2

C No display

¢1

D Detailed information

¢1, 2

AWB

STDSTDSTD

−

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFSAFSAFS

AWB

−

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFSAFSAFS

−

AUTO

AWB

AFS

STD

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 55 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ Recording guide line

When you align the subject on the horizontal and vertical guide lines or the cross point of

these lines, you can take pictures with well-designed composition by viewing the size, the

slope and the balance of the subject.

∫ Set the position of the guide line with [ ]

•

Set the [GUIDE LINE] in the [CUSTOM] menu to [ ]. (P124)

1 Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu. (P30)

2 Press 2/1 to select guide line, and then press [MENU/SET].

•

You can also use the rear dial to set.

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to set the position.

•

The guide line returns to the center when [‚] is pressed.

4 Press [MENU/SET] to finish the setting.

5 Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu.

•

You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick

Menu.

• Position of the guide line can be set from the [CUSTOM] menu

too.

∫ About the Histogram

A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white)

and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.

It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

Examples of histogram

A []:This is used when dividing the entire screen into 3k3 for taking pictures with a

well-balanced composition.

B []:This is used when you want to position the subject at the exact center of the screen.

C []:Position of the guide line can be set. It is used to take well balanced pictures of

subjects off the center of the image.

1 Properly Exposed

2 Under Exposed

3 Overexposed

¢ Histogram

PPP

3.53.53.5

100100100

200200200

505050

−

AWBAWBAWB

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AWBAWBAWB

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AWBAWBAWB

AUTOAUTOAUTO

AFSAFSAFS

3.53.53.5

AFSAFSAFS

STDSTDSTD STDSTDSTD STDSTDSTD

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 56 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ Set the position of the histogram

•

Set the [HISTOGRAM] in the [CUSTOM] menu to [ON]. (P124)

1 Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu. (P30)

2 Press 2/1 to select histogram, and then press [MENU/SET].

•

You can also use the rear dial to set.

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to set the position.

4 Press [MENU/SET] to finish the setting.

5 Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu.

•

You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick

Menu.

•

Position of the histogram can be set from the [CUSTOM] menu too.

Note

•

When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the

following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange.

– When the Manual Exposure Assistance is other than [n0EV] during Exposure Compensation

or in the Manual Exposure Mode

– When the flash is activated

– When the flash is closed

• When the brightness of the screen is not correctly displayed in dark places

• When the exposure is not adequately adjusted

• The histogram is an approximation in the Recording Mode.

• The histogram displayed in this camera does not match histograms displayed by picture editing

software used in PCs etc.

• Histogram is displayed in R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance) during the playback.

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures using the Built-in Flash

A To open the flash

Slide the flash open lever.

B To close the flash

Press the flash until it clicks.

•

Be sure to close the flash when not in use.

• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ] while the flash is

closed.

Note

•

Be careful not to catch a finger when closing a flash bulb.

Applicable modes:

Set the built-in flash to match the recording.

•

Open the flash.

Select [FLASH] in the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

Switching to the appropriate flash setting

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 57 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Press 3/4 to select a mode and press

[MENU/SET].

• For information about flash settings that can be selected, refer

“Available flash settings by Recording Mode”. (P59)

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

The flash is activated twice. The interval between the first and second flash is

longer when [ ], [ ] or [ ] is set. The subject should not move until the

second flash is activated.

¢ [RED-EYE REMOVAL] (P117) on the [REC] Mode menu is set to [ON], [ ] appears on

the flash icon.

Item Description of settings

‡: AUTO

The flash is automatically activated when the recording conditions make

it necessary.

AUTO/Red-Eye

Reduction

The flash is automatically activated when the recording conditions make

it necessary.

It is activated once before the actual recording to reduce the red-eye

phenomenon (eyes of the subject appearing red in the picture) and then

activated again for the actual recording.

• Use this when you take pictures of people in low lighting

conditions.

‰: Forced Flash ON

The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.

• Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent light.

Forced ON/Red-Eye

Reduction

The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.

Simultaneously it reduces the red-eye phenomenon.

•

Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent light.

: Slow Sync.

When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this

feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark

background landscape will appear brighter.

•

Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark

background.

• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod can

enhance your photos.

Slow Sync./

Red-Eye

Reduction

When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature

will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark background

landscape will appear brighter.

Simultaneously it reduces the red-eye phenomenon.

•

Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark

background.

• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod can

enhance your photos.

Œ:

Forced Flash OFF

The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.

• Use this when you take pictures in places where the use of the

flash is not permitted.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 58 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ About the Digital Red-Eye Correction

When [RED-EYE REMOVAL] (P117) has been set to [ON] and Red-Eye Reduction

([ ], [ ], [ ]) is selected, Digital Red-Eye Correction is performed whenever the

flash is used. The camera automatically detects red-eye and corrects the picture. (Only

available when the AF Mode is set to [š] and face detection is active)

•

Under certain circumstances, red-eye cannot be corrected.

• In the following cases, Digital Red-Eye Correction does not work.

– When the flash setting is set to [‡], [‰] or [Œ]

– When [RED-EYE REMOVAL] is set to [OFF]

– When the AF Mode is set to anything except [š]

∫ Available flash settings by Recording Mode

The available flash settings depend on the Recording Mode.

(

: Available, —: Not available,

: Initial setting of Advanced Scene Mode and Scene Mode)

¢ [ ] is displayed. [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] is set depending on the type of subject and

brightness.

• The flash setting may change if the Recording Mode is changed. Set the flash setting again if

necessary.

• The flash setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off. However, the Advanced Scene

Mode or the Scene Mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting when the Advanced Scene

Mode or the Scene Mode is changed.

‡ ‰ Œ ‡ ‰ Œ

—————±¥— ± ———±

±±±±±±± ¥— ± ———±

±±±±——±¥— ± ———±

——±±——±

¥ — ± ———±

——————±¥— ± ———±

±¥±———±

—————¥±

±¥±———±

——————¥

¥±±———± ——————¥

±¥±———± ——————¥

±¥±——±±

——————¥

———± — ¥±

——————¥

±¥±———±

——————¥

;

±¥±———±

——————¥

¥ — ± ———±

¥ — ± ———± ¥±±———±

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 59 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ The available flash range to take pictures

•

The available flash range is an approximation.

¢ When the [ISO LIMIT SET] (P119) is set to [OFF]

• At the time of flash photography, when distance with the subject is near, the flash light is

interrupted with the lens and a part of the picture being taken becomes dark. Check the

distance between the camera and the subject when taking a picture. The distance from which

the subject blocks the flash light differs according to the lens used.

– When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is attached:

45 cm (1.48 feet) or less (Wide)/30 cm (0.99 feet) or less (Tele)

∫ Shutter speed for each flash setting

¢1 This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode

¢2

This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure Mode.

¢3 This becomes B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure Mode.

• When the flash is activated, the shutter speed cannot be set to faster than 1/160th of a second.

• In Intelligent Auto Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified scene.

Note

•

Do not bring the flash too close to objects or close the flash while it is activated. The

objects may be discolored by its heat or lighting.

• Do not close the flash soon after the flash is activated prior to taking pictures due to AUTO/

Red-Eye Reduction etc. It causes a malfunction.

• When you take a picture beyond the available flash range, the exposure may not be adjusted

properly and the picture may become bright or dark.

• When the flash is being charged, the flash icon blinks red, and you cannot take a picture even

when you press the shutter button fully.

• The White Balance may not be properly adjusted if the flash level is insufficient for the subject.

ISO sensitivity

When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is used

Available flash range

Wide Tele

AUTO

45 cm (1.48 feet) to 6.2 m

(20.3 feet)

30 cm (0.99 feet) to 3.9 m

(12.8 feet)

ISO100 45 cm (1.48 feet) to 3.1 m (10.2 feet) 30 cm (0.99 feet) to 1.9 m (6.23 feet)

ISO200 45 cm (1.48 feet) to 4.4 m (14.4 feet) 30 cm (0.99 feet) to 2.7 m (8.85 feet)

ISO400 45cm (1.48feet) to 6.2m (20.3feet) 30cm (0.99feet) to 3.9m (12.8feet)

ISO800 50cm (1.64feet) to 8.8m (28.9feet) 30cm (0.99feet) to 5.5m (18.0feet)

ISO1600

80 cm (2.62 feet) to 12.5 m

(41.0 feet)

50 cm (1.64 feet) to 7.8 m (25.6 feet)

ISO3200

1.1 m (3.61 feet) to 17.7 m

(58.1 feet)

70 cm (2.29 feet) to 11.1 m

(36.4 feet)

ISO6400

1.6 m (5.24 feet) to 25.1 m

(82.3 feet)

1.0 m (3.28 feet) to 15.7 m

(51.5 feet)

Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.) Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.)

‡

1/60

¢1

to 1/4000th 1 to 1/4000th

‰

1/60

¢2

to 1/160th Œ 60

¢3

to 1/4000th

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 60 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• When you use certain lenses, light from the flash may be blocked or fail to cover the lens

field of view, causing dark areas to appear in the resulting pictures.

• When taking a picture with the flash, we recommend removing the lens hood. In some

cases it may not allow the scene to be illuminated properly.

• It may take time to charge the flash if you repeat taking a picture. Take a picture after the

access indication disappears.

• The Red-Eye Reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from

the camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident.

• When you attach an external flash, it takes priority over the built-in flash. Refer to P158 for the

external flash.

Applicable modes:

Adjust the flash output when the subject is small, or the reflectivity is very high or low.

Select [FLASH ADJUST.] in the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press

[MENU/SET].

• You can adjust from [j2 EV] to [i2 EV] in steps of [1/3 EV].

• Select [0 EV] to return to the original flash output.

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Note

•

[i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the screen when the flash level is adjusted.

• The flash output setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off.

Adjust the flash output

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 61 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Applicable modes:

2nd curtain synchro activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures

of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed.

Select [FLASH SYNCHRO] in the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 4 to select [2ND] and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the

menu.

Note

•

Set it to [1ST] normally.

• [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the screen if you set [FLASH SYNCHRO] to [2ND].

• The flash sync. settings are also effective when using an external flash. (P158)

• When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [FLASH SYNCHRO] may deteriorate.

• You cannot set [ ], [ ] or [ ] when [FLASH SYNCHRO] is set to [2ND].

• It can only be set with [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS] in Scene Mode.

Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro

Item Effect

1st curtain synchro

The normal method when taking

pictures with the flash.

2nd curtain synchro

The light source appears behind the

subject and picture becomes

dynamic.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 62 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Compensating the Exposure

Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in

brightness between the subject and the background. Look at the following examples.

Note

•

EV is an abbreviation of [Exposure Value]. It refers to the amount of light given to the CCD by

the aperture value and the shutter speed.

• The set exposure value is memorized even if the camera is turned off. However, the exposure

value during the Intelligent Auto Mode is not memorized.

• The compensation range of the exposure will be limited depending on the brightness of the

subject.

• Rotate the rear dial slowly but surely.

• When the aperture and shutter speed values are displayed in the screen in the Program AE

Mode, Program Shift operation and Exposure Compensation operation is switched every time

the rear dial is pressed.

• In the Aperture-Priority AE Mode, Aperture Setting operation (P84) and Exposure

Compensation operation is switched every time the rear dial is pressed.

• In the Shutter-Priority AE Mode, Shutter Speed Setting operation (P84) and Exposure

Compensation operation is switched every time the rear dial is pressed.

• In Quick Menu (P30) in [ ] (LCD monitor style), after selecting the Exposure Compensation

display using 2/1 or the rear dial, you can compensate the exposure with 3/4.

• In Quick Menu in [ ] (viewfinder style), after selecting the Exposure Compensation display

using the rear dial or 2/1, pressing the rear dial or [MENU/SET] will allow you to compensate

the exposure with the rear dial or 2/1.

Underexposed

Properly

exposed

Overexposed

Compensate the exposure

towards positive.

Compensate the exposure

towards negative.

Press the rear dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation.

Rotate the rear dial to compensate the

exposure.

A Exposure Compensation value

B [EXPO.METER]

• Select [0] to return to the original exposure.

• Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER].

(P127) (However, it does not appear in

ñ//¿//

/// Mode.)

Take a picture.

A B

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 63 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures using Burst Mode

Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

Select the ones you really like from among the pictures you have taken.

Set the drive mode lever to [ ].

Focus on the subject and take a picture.

A When Burst Mode is set to high speed [H].

• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the

Burst Mode.

∫ Changing the burst speed

1 Select [BURST RATE] in the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

2 Press 3/4 to select the burst speed and then press

[MENU/SET].

3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

•

You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

¢1 Number of recordable pictures

¢2 Pictures can be taken until the capacity of the card becomes full. However the burst speed

will become slower halfway. The exact timing of this depends on the aspect ratio, the picture

size, the setting for the quality and the type of card used.

• First burst speed has no relation with the transfer speed of the card.

• The burst speed values given above apply when the shutter speed is 1/60 or faster and when

the flash is not activated.

• The Burst Mode speed may become slower depending on the following settings.

– [SENSITIVITY] (P79)/[PICTURE SIZE] (P114)/[QUALITY] (P115)/[FOCUS PRIORITY]

(P126)/Focus Mode

• Refer to P115 for information about RAW files.

[H]

(High speed)

[M]

(Middle speed)

[L]

(Low speed)

Burst speed (pictures/second) 3.2 2.6 2

Live View during Burst Mode None Available Available

With RAW files

4 to 7

¢2

Without RAW files

Depends on the remaining capacity of the card

¢2

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 64 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ Focusing in Burst Mode

The focus changes depending on the setting for [FOCUS PRIORITY] (P126) in the

[CUSTOM] menu and the Focus Mode setting.

¢1 When subject is dark, the focus is fixed on the first picture.

¢2 The burst speed may become slower because the camera is continuously focusing on the

subject.

¢3 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range.

Note

•

We recommend using the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) when you want to keep the

shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode. Refer to P160 for information

about the remote shutter.

• When the burst speed is set to [H], the exposure and White Balance are fixed at the settings

used for the first picture for the subsequent pictures as well. When the burst speed is set to [M]

or [L], they are adjusted each time you take a picture.

• If you are following a moving subject while taking pictures in a place indoors, outdoors etc.

where there is a large difference between the light and shade (landscape), it may take time until

the exposure is stable. If burst is used at this time, the exposure may not become optimal.

• Since the shutter speed becomes slower in dark places, the burst speed (pictures/second) may

become slower.

• When set to [H], the Auto Review function is activated regardless of the Auto Review setting.

(Will not hold) You cannot set the Auto Review function in the [SETUP] menu.

When set to [M] or [L], Live View is displayed between burst frames.

• When the flash is activated, you can take only 1 picture.

• White Balance Bracket (P79) will record 3 pictures at 1 recording, so it will take longer to

be able to take the next picture.

• Maximum of 3 films will be recorded depending on the Multi Film Bracket setting during

the Multi Film Bracket recording (P83).

Focus Mode Focus Priority Focus

AFS

At the first picture

OFF

AFC

¢1

Normal focusing

¢2

OFF

Predicted focusing

¢3

MF — Focus set with Manual Focus

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 65 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket

Maximum of 7 pictures will be recorded with different exposure settings following the

Exposure Compensation range every time the shutter button is pressed.

You can select the picture with the desired exposure among different exposures.

With Auto Bracket

[STEP]: [3•1/3], [SEQUENCE]: [0/s/r]

Set the drive mode lever to [ ].

Focus on the subject and take a picture.

• If you press and hold the shutter button, the number

of pictures that you set is taken.

• The Auto Bracket indication A blinks until the

number of pictures that you set is taken.

• The picture count is reset to [0] if you change the

Auto Bracket setting, change the setting on the drive

mode lever or turn the camera off before all the

pictures that you set are taken.

1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture

d0EV j1/3 EV i1/3 EV

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 66 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ Changing the settings for [STEP] and [SEQUENCE] in Auto Bracket

1 Select [AUTO BRACKET] in the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

2 Press 3/4 to select [STEP] or [SEQUENCE] and then

press 1.

3 Press 3/4 to select the setting and then press [MENU/SET].

4 Press [MENU/SET] twice to close the menu.

•

You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Note

•

When taking pictures using Auto Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation range, the

pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation range.

• The exposure may not be compensated with Auto Bracket depending on the brightness of the

subject.

• The Auto Review function is activated regardless of the Auto Review setting. (Will not hold) You

cannot set the Auto Review function in the [SETUP] menu.

• When the flash is activated, you can take only 1 picture.

• Set number of pictures cannot be recorded if the recordable number of pictures is less than set

number of pictures.

• Settings for Multi Film Bracket have priority during the Multi Film Bracket recording

(P83).

Item

Settings

Item

Settings

[STEP]

[3•1/3] (3 pictures)

[SEQUENCE]

[0/`/_]

[3•2/3] (3 pictures) [`/0/_]

[5•1/3] (5 pictures)

[5•2/3] (5 pictures)

[7•1/3] (7 pictures)

[7•2/3] (7 pictures)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 67 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures with the Self-timer

Set the drive mode lever to [ë].

Press the shutter button halfway to focus

and then press it fully to take the picture.

A When self-timer is set to [ ].

• A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into

focus.

Focus and exposure will be set when the

shutter button is pressed halfway.

•

If you want to press the shutter button fully to take a

picture even when the subject is not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM]

menu to [OFF]. (P126)

• The self-timer indicator B blinks and the shutter is activated after

10 seconds (or 2 seconds).

• If you press [MENU/SET] while taking a picture with the self-timer, it

is canceled.

• When [ ] is selected, the self-timer indicator blinks again after the

first and the second pictures are taken and the shutter is activated

2 seconds after it blinks.

∫ Changing the time setting for the self-timer

1 Select [SELF-TIMER] in the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

2 Press 3/4 to select the mode and then press

[MENU/SET].

•

If you set [ ], after 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 second intervals.

3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

•

You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Note

•

When using a tripod etc., setting the self-timer to 2 seconds is a convenient way to avoid the

jitter caused by pressing the shutter button.

• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.

• Depending on the recording conditions, the recording interval may become more than

2 seconds when [ ] is selected.

• The flash output may not be constant when [ ] is set.

Item Settings

10 seconds

10 seconds/3 pictures

2 seconds

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 68 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• Operation will be same as [ ] even if it is set to [ ] while Multi Film Bracket recording

(P83).

• Use the Quick Menu (P30) to set when in Intelligent Auto Mode.

• Self-timer cannot be set to [ ] in Intelligent Auto Mode.

[REC] Mode:

Setting the Method used to Focus (AF Mode)

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be

selected.

Select the mode that matches the recording conditions and the composition.

Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].

Press 2 ( ) and then press 2/1 to select AF

Mode.

• You can also use the rear dial to select.

Press [MENU/SET] to close.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close.

Item Effect

[š]: Face detection

The camera automatically detects the person’s face. The

focus and exposure can then be adjusted to fit that face no

matter what portion of the picture it is in. (max. 15 areas)

[ ]: AF Tracking

Focus and exposure can be adjusted to a specified subject.

Focus and exposure will keep on following the subject even

if it moves. (Dynamic Tracking)

[]:

23-area-focusing

Up to 23 points for each AF area can be focused. This is

effective when the subject is not in the center of the screen.

(AF area frame will be same as image aspect ratio setting)

[Ø]: 1-area-focusing

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the

screen.

Position and size of the AF area can be changed.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 69 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Note

•

When the subject is not in the center of the composition in [Ø], you can bring the subject into

the AF area, fix the focus and exposure by pressing the shutter button halfway, move the

camera to the composition you want with the shutter button pressed halfway, and then take the

picture. (Only when the focus mode dial is set to [AFS])

• The camera is focusing on all the AF areas using [ ] when multiple AF areas (max. 23 areas)

light at the same time. If you want to determine the focus position to take pictures, switch the

AF Mode to [Ø].

• If the AF Mode is set to [š] or [ ], the AF area is not displayed until the picture is brought into

focus. Also, if you set the Focus Mode to [AFC] in [ ], AF area will not be displayed even if the

subject comes into focus.

• When it is set to [ ] during motion picture recording, it will switch to Multi Auto Focus Mode for

motion pictures.

• The camera may detect the subjects other than a person as the face. In this case, switch the

AF Mode to any modes other than [š] and then take a picture.

• [FACE RECOG.] only works when [š] is set.

• It is not possible to set [š] in the following cases.

–In [FOOD] in [CLOSE-UP]

–In [NIGHT SCENERY] and [ILLUMINATIONS] in [NIGHT PORTRAIT]

• The [AF MODE] is fixed to [Ø] when using the Digital Zoom.

• AF area will be fixed to a small point in [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS] in Scene Mode.

∫ About [š] (Face Detection)

When the camera detects a person’s face, the following color AF

area is displayed.

Yellow:

When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the frame turns green

when the camera is focused.

White:

Displayed when more than one face is detected. Other faces that are the same distance

away as faces within the yellow AF areas are also focused.

•

When [š] is selected and [METERING MODE] is set to multiple [C], the camera will adjust

the exposure to suit the person’s face.

• Under certain picture-taking conditions including the following cases, the facial recognition

function may fail to work, making it impossible to detect faces. [AF MODE] is switched to [ ].

– When the face is not facing the camera

– When the face is at an angle

– When the face is extremely bright or dark

– When there is little contrast on the faces

– When the facial features are hidden behind sunglasses, etc.

– When the face appears small on the screen

– When there is rapid movement

– When the subject is other than a human being

– When the camera is shaking

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 70 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Note

•

If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear. Try to lock again.

• AF Tracking will not operate when it has failed to AF track. AF Mode will be switched to [Ø] in

that case.

• [FACE RECOG.] does not work when AF Tracking is active.

• In the following cases, [ ] operates as [Ø]

–When the Film Mode is [STANDARD]( ), [DYNAMIC]( ), [SMOOTH]( )

–When My Color Mode is [MONOCHROME]

• Dynamic Tracking function may not work in the following cases:

–When the subject is too small

–When the recording location is too dark or bright

–When the subject is moving too fast

–When the background has the same or similar color to the subject

–When jitter is occurring

–When zoom is operated

Setting up [ ] (AF Tracking)

Bring the subject to the AF

Tracking frame, and press the

shutter button halfway to lock

the subject.

A AF Tracking frame (White)

B AF Tracking frame (Yellow)

Before locking Locked

• When the subject is recognized, AF area will turn green and the subject will be locked.

Focus and exposure will be fixed automatically and continuously in accordance with

the movement of the subject when you release the shutter button (Dynamic Tracking).

AF area will be displayed in yellow in this case.

• AF Tracking is canceled when [MENU/SET] or 2 is pressed.

Take the picture.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 71 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

AF area can be moved when [Ø] is selected. The size of AF area can also be changed.

Select [Ø] and then press 4.

• AF area setting screen is displayed. It will return to previous

screen by pressing [DISPLAY].

Press 3/4/2/1 to move the AF area.

• You can set to arbitrary position of the screen. (It cannot be set

to edge of the screen)

• The AF area returns to the center when [‚] is pressed.

Rotate the rear dial to change the size of the AF

area.

Rear dial right: Enlarge

Rear dial left: Shrink

•

It can be changed to 4 different sizes of “spot” A, “normal” B,

“large” C, and “extra large” D.

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

∫ Move the AF area easily while taking pictures

When the [DIRECT AF AREA] (P125) in the [CUSTOM] menu is set to [ON] while [Ø] is

selected, it is possible to move the AF area directly with 3/4/2/1.

It is also possible to change the size of AF area by rotating the rear dial in the screen to set

the position.

•

[SENSITIVITY] (P79), [Fn BUTTON SET] (P123), [AF MODE] (P69), or [WHITE BALANCE]

(P76) cannot be set with 3/4/2/1. Make the setting with the Quick Menu (P30).

Note

•

The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when using [Ù]. (P118)

• Set the size of AF area to “normal”, “large”, or “extra large” when it is hard to focus using the

“spot”.

• [DIRECT AF AREA] is fixed to [OFF] in Advanced Scene Mode, all Scene Modes other than

[PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS], or My Color Mode.

Setting the AF area

B DC

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 72 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures with Manual Focus

Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens

and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate Auto Focus.

Set the focus mode dial to [MF].

• [ ] is displayed on a screen for about 5 seconds.

Rotate the focus ring to focus on the subject.

• When the [MF ASSIST] (P126) in the [CUSTOM] menu is set

to [ON], screen will be enlarged about 5 times as MF Assist.

• MF guide A is displayed on the screen when the focus ring is

rotated if the [MF GUIDE] (P127) in the [CUSTOM] menu is set

to [ON]. You can check the direction of rotation of the focus ring

is toward the near side or the far side.

• The enlarged area can be moved by pressing the cursor button toward 3/4/2/1.

• MF Assist is enlarged from 5 times to 10 times when the rear dial is rotated right. It will

return to 5 times by rotating the rear dial left.

• MF Assist or MF guide will disappear about 10 seconds after you stop operating the

focus ring or 3/4/2/1.

Take the picture.

∫ MF ASSIST

If [MF ASSIST] (P126) of [CUSTOM] menu is set to [OFF], an enlarged screen will not be

displayed as MF Assist, even if focus ring is rotated. To display the MF Assist, press 2

and then press [MENU/SET] for enlarged display.

1 Press 2 to display the MF Assist position setting screen.

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to change the position of the MF Assist

screen.

•

The following will return the MF assistance to the original

position.

–When the Focus Mode is set to other than [MF]

–Changing [ASPECT RATIO] or [PICTURE SIZE].

–Turning the camera off.

3 Press [MENU/SET] to magnify the MF Assist position

setting screen.

•

For the operations while displaying the MF Assist, refer to step 2

of the

“Taking Pictures with Manual Focus” procedure.

4 Press [MENU/SET] to close MF Assist.

•

The screen returns to the previous screen.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 73 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ Technique for Manual Focus

1 Rotate the focus ring to focus on the

subject.

2 Rotate it a little more.

3 Finely focus on the subject by rotating the

focus ring slowly in reverse.

∫ About the focus distance reference mark

The focus distance reference mark is a mark

used to measure the focus distance.

Use this when taking pictures with Manual

Focus or taking close-up pictures.

A Focus distance reference mark

B Focus distance reference line

C 0.3 m (0.99 feet) (When the

14–42 mm/

F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is used)

• If you are taking close-up pictures

– We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P68).

– The effective focus range (depth of field) is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance

between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become

difficult to focus on it again.

– The resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease slightly. This is not a malfunction.

Note

•

When the MF Assist is started by 2, MF Assist will continue to display even after 10 seconds

has past without operating the focus ring or 3/4/2/1.

• If you use the zoom function after focusing on the subject, focus on the subject again.

• The MF Assist does not appear when using the Digital Zoom or recording motion pictures.

• Even if 2 is pressed in My Color Mode, the MF Assist position setting screen is not displayed.

• After canceling Sleep Mode, focus on the subject again.

• MF Assist or MF guide may not display depending on the lens used.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 74 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock)

This is useful when you want to take a picture of a subject outside the AF area or the

contrast is too strong and you cannot achieve appropriate exposure.

∫ Fixing the exposure only

Align the screen with the subject.

Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the

exposure.

A [AF/AE LOCK] button

• The aperture value and the shutter speed light.

• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AE Lock is canceled.

While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the

camera as you compose the picture.

B AE lock indication

Press the shutter button halfway to focus

on the subject and then press it fully.

∫ Fixing the focus or the focus/the exposure

1 Select [AF/AE LOCK] in the [CUSTOM] menu. (P28)

2 Press 3/4 to select [AF] or [AF/AE] and then press

[MENU/SET].

3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

•

You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Taking pictures when [AF] or [AF/AE] is set

1 Aim the lens at the subject.

2 Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the focus and the exposure.

•

When [AF] is selected, [AFL], the focus indication, aperture value, the shutter speed light

when the subject is focused.

• When [AF/AE] is selected, [AFL], [AEL], the focus indication, aperture value and the

shutter speed light when the subject is focused and the exposure is set.

• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is canceled.

3 While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the camera to the composition you would like to

take and then press the shutter button fully.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 75 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Note

•

If you set [AF/AE LOCK HOLD] in the [CUSTOM] menu to [ON], you can fix the focus and the

exposure even if you release [AF/AE LOCK] after pressing it. (P125)

• The brightness of the image displayed on the LCD monitor/viewfinder (Live View) will be also

locked when the AE lock is performed.

• AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode.

• AE Lock only is effective during Manual Focus or Preview Mode.

• AE Lock and AF lock can be used during motion picture recording, but AE/AF lock cannot be

performed again during motion picture recording. During motion picture recording only

cancellation of AE/AF lock can be performed.

• The exposure is set, even if the brightness of the subject changes.

• The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is

locked.

• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.

[REC] Mode:

Adjusting the White Balance

In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the color of white

takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the color of white which is closest to

what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.

Press 1 ().

Press 2/1 to select the White Balance and then

press [MENU/SET] to set.

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

¢It cannot be selected in the Motion Picture Mode.

Item Recording conditions

[AWB] Automatic adjustment

[V] When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky

[Ð] When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky

[î] When taking pictures outdoors in the shade

[Ñ] When taking pictures under incandescent lights

[]

When taking pictures with the flash only

[]/[]

When

using the preset White Balance

[] When using the preset color temperature setting

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 76 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ Auto White Balance

Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on

a reddish or bluish tinge. Furthermore, when a multiple number of light sources are being

used or there is nothing with a color close to white, Auto White Balance may not function

properly. In a case like this, set the White Balance to a mode other than [AWB].

1 Auto White Balance will work within this range.

2 Blue sky

3 Cloudy sky (Rain)

4 Shade

5 Sunlight

6 White fluorescent light

7 Incandescent light bulb

8 Sunrise and sunset

9 Candlelight

KlKelvin Color Temperature

Note

•

The optimal White Balance will differ depending on the type of halogen lighting being recorded

under so use [AWB], [ ] or [ ].

• The White Balance might not be adjusted for a subject that the flash cannot reach when the

flash is used.

• The White Balance is memorized even if the camera is turned off, but [WHITE BALANCE] for

the Advanced Scene Mode or the Scene Mode is set to [AWB] when the Advanced Scene

Mode or the Scene Mode is changed.

• White Balance is fixed to [AWB] in following conditions.

– In Intelligent Auto Mode

– In [OUTDOOR PORTRAIT] and [INDOOR PORTRAIT] in [PORTRAIT]

– In [SCENERY]

– In [OUTDOOR SPORTS] and [INDOOR SPORTS] in [SPORTS]

– In [FOOD] in [CLOSE-UP]

– In [NIGHT PORTRAIT]

– In [SUNSET] or [PARTY] in Scene Mode

– My Color Mode

• When [DIRECT AF AREA] (P125) is set to [ON], the operations on the cursor buttons translate

to movements of the AF area. Set using the Quick Menu (P30).

Set the White Balance value. Use to match the condition when taking photographs.

Select [ ] or [ ] and then press 3.

Aim the camera at a sheet of white paper etc. so

that the frame in the center is filled by the white

object only and then press [MENU/SET].

Note

•

You may not be able to properly set a White Balance if the subject is too bright or too dark. In

this case, adjust the subject to an appropriate brightness and then reset the White Balance.

Setting the White Balance manually

1 2

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 77 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

You can set the color temperature manually for taking natural pictures in different lighting

conditions. The color of light is measured as a number in degrees Kelvin. As the color

temperature increases, the picture becomes more bluish. As the color temperature

decreases, the picture becomes more reddish.

Select [ ] and then press 3.

Press 3/4 to select the color temperature and

then press [MENU/SET].

• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

You can finely adjust the White Balance when you cannot acquire the desired hue by

setting the White Balance.

Select the White Balance and then press 4.

Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the White Balance and

then press [MENU/SET].

Note

•

If you finely adjust the White Balance to A (amber), the White Balance icon on the screen will

change to orange. If you finely adjust the White Balance to B (blue), the White Balance icon on

the screen will change to blue.

• If you finely adjust the White Balance to G_ (green) or M` (magenta), [_] (green) or [`]

(magenta) appears beside the White Balance icon on the screen.

• Press [DISPLAY] to return to the center point.

• Select the center point if you are not finely adjusting the White Balance.

• The White Balance fine adjustment setting is reflected in the picture when using the flash.

• You can finely adjust the White Balance independently for each White Balance item.

• The White Balance fine adjustment setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off.

• The White Balance fine adjustment level returns to the standard setting (center point) in the

following cases.

– When you reset the White Balance in [ ] or [ ]

– When you reset the color temperature manually in [ ]

Setting the color temperature

Finely adjusting the White Balance [ ]

2 : A (AMBER: ORANGE)

1 : B (BLUE: BLUISH)

3 :

G_ (GREEN: GREENISH)

4 : M` (MAGENTA: REDDISH)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 78 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Bracket setting is performed based on the adjustment values for the White Balance fine

adjustment, and 3 pictures with different colors are automatically recorded when the

shutter button is pressed once.

Finely adjust the White Balance in step 2 of the

“Finely adjusting the White Balance” procedure,

and rotate the rear dial to set the bracket.

Rear dial right: Horizontal (A to B)

Rear dial left: Vertical (Gi to Mj)

Press [MENU/SET].

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

Note

•

[ ] is displayed in White Balance icon in the screen when the White Balance Bracket is set.

• The White Balance Bracket setting is released when the power has been turned off (including

Sleep Mode).

• Pictures can be taken with White Balance Bracket regardless of the drive mode settings.

• You will only hear the shutter sound once.

• White Balance Bracket cannot be set when the [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ], or [ ].

• White Balance Bracket will be disabled when the Multi Film Bracket is set.

• White Balance Bracket does not work when recording motion pictures.

[REC] Mode:

Setting the Light Sensitivity

This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set. Setting to a higher figure

enables pictures to be taken even in dark places without the resulting pictures coming out

dark.

Press 3 ().

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the ISO sensitivity and

then press [MENU/SET] to set.

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

White Balance Bracket

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 79 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

¢ When the [ISO LIMIT SET] of [REC] Mode menu (P119) is set to anything except [OFF],

it is set automatically within the value set in [ISO LIMIT SET].

It is set as following when the [ISO LIMIT SET] is set to [OFF].

• When [AUTO] is selected, ISO sensitivity is adjusted automatically depending on

brightness within a maximum setting of [ISO400].

• When setting to [ ], ISO sensitivity will adjust automatically depending on brightness

within the maximum setting of [ISO800]. ([ISO400] when the flash is used)

∫ About [ ] (Intelligent ISO sensitivity control)

The camera automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity and shutter speed to suit the

movement of the subject and brightness of the scene to minimize the jitter of the subject.

• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It is continuously

changing to match the movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed fully. Confirm

the actual shutter speed on the information display for the picture being played back.

Note

•

The higher the value set for the ISO sensitivity, the more the jitter is reduced but the greater the

amount of picture noise.

• Refer to P60 for the flash range.

• Depending on the brightness and how fast the subject is moving, jitter may not be avoided even

if [ ] is selected.

• Movements may not be detected when a moving subject is small, when a moving subject is at

the edge of the screen or when a subject has moved at the very moment when the shutter

button was pressed fully.

• The setting is fixed to [ ] in the following cases.

– In [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode

– In [INDOOR PORTRAIT], [NORMAL SPORTS], [OUTDOOR SPORTS] and [INDOOR

SPORTS] in Advanced Scene Mode

• Program Shift cannot be activated when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ ].

• You cannot select [ ] in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and Manual Exposure Mode. Also, you

cannot select [AUTO] in Manual Exposure Mode.

• To avoid picture noise, we recommend reducing the ISO sensitivity, setting [NOISE

REDUCTION] in [FILM MODE] towards [_] or setting the items except [NOISE REDUCTION]

towards [`] to take pictures. (P82)

• When [DIRECT AF AREA] (P125) is set to [ON], the operations on the cursor buttons translate

to movements of the AF area. Set using the Quick Menu (P30).

ISO sensitivity

100 6400

Recording location

(recommended)

When it is light (outdoors) When it is dark

Shutter speed Slow Fast

Noise Less Increased

ISO sensitivity

Settings

AUTO

The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the

brightness.

(Intelligent)

The ISO sensitivity is adjusted according to the movement of

the subject and the brightness.

100/200/400/800/1600/3200/

6400

The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings.

(When the [ISO INCREMENTS] in [REC] Mode menu

(P119) is set to [1/3 EV], items of ISO sensitivity that can

be set will increase.)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 80 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Change Tone of the Color for the Picture to be

taken (Film Mode)

[You can only select [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in [ ], [¿], [ ], [ ], [ ],

[ ] and [ ] Mode.]

Just as each type of film for film cameras has its own color tone and contrast

characteristics, Film Mode allows you to select up to 9 different “digital films”, color tones,

in the same way as you would select different films for film cameras. Select different

settings in Film Mode to match the photo look you wish to achieve.

Select [FILM MODE] in the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 2/1 to select an item, and then press

[MENU/SET].

• You can also use the rear dial to select.

• When you press [DISPLAY] on the screen shown right,

explanations about each Film Mode are displayed. (When you

press [DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the previous

screen.)

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Note

•

When in Intelligent Auto Mode or Motion Picture Mode, use the Quick Menu (P30) for settings.

When [Fn BUTTON SET] (P123) is set to [FILM MODE], settings can also be performed by

pressing 4.

•

In Film Mode, the camera may do something equivalent to pull processing or push processing to

create a picture with particular characteristics. The shutter speed may become very slow at this time.

Item Effect

[STANDARD] (COLOR) This is the standard setting.

[DYNAMIC] (COLOR) The saturation and contrast of the stored colors are increased.

[SMOOTH] (COLOR) The contrast is lowered for smoother and clearer color.

[NATURE] (COLOR) Brighter red, green and blue. Enhanced beauty of nature.

[NOSTALGIC] (COLOR) Lower saturation and contrast. Reflecting passage of time.

[VIBRANT] (COLOR) Higher saturation and contrast than dynamic.

[STANDARD] ( ) This is the standard setting.

[DYNAMIC] ( ) The contrast is increased.

[SMOOTH] ( ) Smooths the picture without losing the skin texture.

[MY FILM 1]/[MY FILM 2] The saved setting is used.

[MULTI FILM]

It will take pictures changing the type of film in accordance with

the setting every time the shutter button is pressed. (Up to 3

pictures)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 81 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Press 2/1 to select a film.

Press 3/4 to select an item and 2/1 to adjust.

• You can also use the rear dial to adjust.

• Registered settings are memorized even if the camera is

turned off.

Press 3/4 to select the [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET].

Press 3/4 to select an item, and then press

[MENU/SET].

• You can register 2 settings. ([MY FILM 1] and [MY FILM 2])

(After registering, the Film Mode name that was registered

previously is displayed.)

• [STANDARD] is registered in [MY FILM 1] and [MY FILM 2] at

the time of purchase.

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Note

•

Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places. To avoid picture noise, we

recommend setting [NOISE REDUCTION] towards [_] or setting the items except [NOISE

REDUCTION] towards [`] to take pictures.

• If you adjust a Film Mode, [_] is displayed beside the Film Mode icon on the screen.

• You cannot adjust [SATURATION] in the black and white settings in Film Mode.

• Film Mode cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto Mode, Advanced Scene Mode and Scene

Mode.

Adjusting each Film Mode to the desired setting

Item Effect

[CONTRAST]

[r]

Increases the difference between the brightness and the

darkness in the picture.

[s]

Decreases the difference between the brightness and the

darkness in the picture.

[SHARPNESS]

[r] The picture is sharply defined.

[s] The picture is softly focused.

[SATURATION]

[r] The colors in the picture become vivid.

[s] The colors in the picture become natural.

[NOISE

REDUCTION]

[r]

The noise reduction effect is enhanced. Picture resolution may

deteriorate slightly.

[s]

The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can obtain pictures

with higher resolution.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 82 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

It will take pictures changing the type of film in accordance with the setting every time the

shutter button is pressed. (Up to 3 pictures)

Press 2/1 to select [MULTI FILM].

Select either [MULTI FILM 1], [MULTI FILM 2], or

[MULTI FILM 3] with 3/4, and then select the film

to be set for each with 2/1.

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

• [OFF] can be selected only for [MULTI FILM 3].

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Focus on the subject and take a picture.

• It will continuously take pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed when it is set to

Burst Mode. (Up to 3 pictures)

• When using a self-timer, up to 3 pictures with set film will be taken if the shutter button is

pressed. (It will operate same as [ ] even if it is set to [ ].)

• Multi film indication ([ ]) displayed on the screen will flash until all pictures of preset

amount are taken.

Note

•

[STANDARD] is registered in [MULTI FILM 1], [MULTI FILM 2] and [OFF] is registered in

[MULTI FILM 3] at the time of purchase.

• White Balance Bracket will be disabled when the Multi Film Bracket is set.

• Motion pictures are recorded with the settings for the [MULTI FILM 1] setting.

Multi Film Bracket

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 83 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode: ±´

Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/

Shutter Speed

Set the aperture value to a higher number when you want a sharp focus background. Set

the aperture value to a lower number when you want a soft focus background.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Rotate the rear dial to set the aperture

value.

• It will switch between aperture setting operation and

Exposure Compensation operation every time the

rear dial is pressed.

• Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER].

(P127)

Take a picture.

When you want to take a sharp picture of a fast moving subject, set with a faster shutter

speed. When you want to create a trail effect, set to a slower shutter speed.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter

speed.

• It will switch between shutter speed setting operation

and Exposure Compensation operation every time

the rear dial is pressed.

• Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER].

(P127)

Take a picture.

Note

•

The brightness of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the

pictures on the playback screen.

• Set the aperture value to a higher number when the subject is too bright in Aperture-Priority AE

Mode. Set the aperture value to a lower number when the subject is too dim.

• When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the setting for the rear dial becomes effective if you

rotate the aperture ring to the [A] position and the aperture ring setting takes priority if you

rotate the aperture ring to a position other than [A] in Aperture-Priority AE Mode.

• The aperture value and the shutter speed displayed on the screen turn red and blink when the

exposure is not adequate.

[ ] Aperture-priority AE

[ ] Shutter-priority AE

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 84 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slow.

• When the flash is activated, the shutter speed cannot be set to faster than 1/160th of a second

in Shutter-Priority AE Mode. (P60)

• If you press the shutter button fully when the shutter speed is slow, the shutter speed on the

screen counts down in Shutter-Priority AE Mode.

• [ ] and [ ] cannot be set for Shutter-Priority AE Mode.

• The [SENSITIVITY] is automatically set to [AUTO] when you switch the Recording Mode to

Shutter-Priority AE Mode while the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ ] (Intelligent).

[REC] Mode: ²

Taking Picture by Setting the Exposure Manually

Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.

The Manual Exposure Assistance appears on the lower portion of the screen to indicate

the exposure.

Set the mode dial to [²].

Rotate the rear dial to set the aperture and

shutter speed.

• It will switch between aperture setting operation and

shutter speed setting operation every time the rear

dial is pressed.

• Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER].

(P127)

• You can also set the focus manually by rotating the focus mode dial to [MF]. (P73)

Press the shutter button halfway.

A Manual Exposure Assistance

• Set the aperture value and the shutter speed again

when the exposure is not adequate.

Take the picture.

∫ Manual Exposure Assistance

•

The Manual Exposure Assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures

on the playback screen.

The exposure is adequate.

Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value.

Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 85 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ About [B] (Bulb)

If you set the shutter speed to [B], the shutter stays open while the shutter button is

pressed fully (up to about 4 minutes).

The shutter closes if you release the shutter button.

Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of

fireworks, a night scene etc.

•

If you set the shutter speed to [B], [B] is displayed on the screen.

• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], use a sufficiently charged battery.

(P21)

• We recommend using a tripod or the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) when you take

pictures with the shutter speed set to [B]. Refer to P160 for information about the remote

shutter.

• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], noise may become visible. To avoid

picture noise, we recommend setting [LONG SHTR NR] in the [REC] Mode menu to [ON]

before taking pictures. (P120)

• The Manual Exposure Assistance does not appear.

Note

•

The brightness of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder may differ from the brightness of the actual

pictures. Check the pictures using the playback screen.

• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink

when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

• [‡], [ ], [ ] and [ ] for flash cannot be set.

• The [SENSITIVITY] is automatically set to [ISO100] when you switch the Recording Mode to

Manual Exposure while the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [AUTO] or [ ] (Intelligent).

• If you press the shutter button fully when the shutter speed is slow, the shutter speed on the

screen counts down.

• When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the aperture ring setting takes priority.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 86 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed

(Preview Mode)

You can check the depth of field (effective focus range) before taking a picture by closing

the leaf shutter to the aperture value you set.

Press [ ] A (preview button).

• Preview screen is displayed. It will return to

previous screen when [ ] is pressed.

∫ Depth of field properties

¢1 Recording conditions

¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc.

¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background

etc.

Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual picture that will be taken with that

shutter speed.

When the shutter speed is set for high speed, display in the shutter speed preview will be

displayed like a time-release film. It is used in cases such as stopping the movement of

running water.

Press [DISPLAY] while displaying the preview screen.

• Shutter speed preview screen is

displayed. It will return to previous

screen by pressing [DISPLAY]

again.

Note

•

Operation method of [ ] can be changed with [PREVIEW HOLD] of [CUSTOM] menu

(P127).

• It is possible to record while in Preview Mode.

• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/1000th of a second.

Confirm the effects of aperture

¢1

Aperture value Small Large

Focus length of the lens Tele Wide

Distance to the subject Near Distant

Depth of field (effective focus range) Shallow (Narrow)

¢2

Deep (Wide)

¢3

Confirm the effects of shutter speed

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 87 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking Expressive Portraits and Landscape

Pictures

(Advanced Scene Mode)

You can take high-quality pictures of such subjects as people, scenery, sporting events

and activities, flowers and people in night scenes in accordance with the surrounding

conditions.

Set the mode dial.

Press 2/1 to select the Advanced Scene Mode.

• You can also use the rear dial to select.

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• The menu screen is switched to the recording screen in the

selected Advanced Scene Mode.

∫ About the information

•

If you press [DISPLAY] when selecting an Advanced Scene Mode in

step

2, explanations about each Advanced Scene Mode are displayed.

(If you press [DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the screen shown

in step

2.)

Note

•

To change the Advanced Scene Mode, press [MENU/SET], and return to above step 2 by

pressing 1, while selecting the Advanced Scene Mode menu [ ] by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• The Advanced Scene Mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting when the Advanced Scene

Mode is changed and then used.

• When you take a picture with a Advanced Scene Mode that is not adequate for the purpose,

the hue of the picture may differ from the actual scene.

• The following items cannot be set in Advanced Scene Mode because the camera automatically

adjusts them to the optimal setting.

– [SENSITIVITY]/Items other than [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in Film Mode/

[METERING MODE]/[FLASH SYNCHRO]/[I.RESOLUTION]/[I.EXPOSURE]/

[ISO LIMIT SET]/[DIGITAL ZOOM]

∫ About the aperture value and the shutter speed when you select a creative setting

•

You can change the aperture value and the shutter speed if you select

a creative setting in Advanced Scene Mode. If you cannot get an

adequate exposure when you rotate the rear dial, the aperture value

and the shutter speed or the selection cursor will turn red.

• You can also press 2/1 to set.

• It will switch between aperture setting or shutter speed setting

operation and Exposure Compensation operation when the rear dial is

pressed.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 88 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

The person stands out from the background and has a healthier complexion.

∫ Technique for Portrait Mode

To make this mode more effective:

1 Rotate the zoom ring as far as possible to Tele.

2 Move close to the subject to make this mode more effective.

Note

•

In [INDOOR PORTRAIT], the Intelligent ISO sensitivity control operates, and the maximum ISO

sensitivity level becomes [ISO400].

• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].

[PORTRAIT]

[NORMAL PORTRAIT]

Shades the background and photographs skin color beautifully.

[SOFT SKIN]

Makes the skin surface appear especially smooth.

•

When [SOFT SKIN] is selected, if a part of the background etc. is a color close to skin

color, this part is also smoothed.

• When [SOFT SKIN] is selected, this mode may not be effective when there is insufficient

brightness.

[OUTDOOR PORTRAIT]

Prevents faces from appearing dark when taking photographs outside.

[INDOOR PORTRAIT]

Sets the ISO sensitivity setting to the appropriate setting to prevent blurring of photo

subject for indoor photography.

[CREATIVE PORTRAIT]

You can change the amount of background blurring by changing the aperture value (P84).

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 89 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

This allows you to take pictures of a wide landscape.

Note

•

The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].

Set here when you want to take pictures of sports scenes or other fast-moving events.

[SCENERY]

[NORMAL SCENERY]

The focus adjusts onto far away subjects as a priority.

[NATURE]

The best setting for photographing natural scenery.

[ARCHITECTURE]

This setting takes sharp photographs of architecture. The guide lines are displayed. (P56)

[CREATIVE SCENERY]

The shutter speed (P84) can be changed in the [NORMAL SCENERY] setting.

[SPORTS]

[NORMAL SPORTS]

Controls the ISO sensitivity while stopping movement with a high shutter speed.

[OUTDOOR SPORTS]

Fast shutter speed for stopping movement when taking photographs outdoors in good

weather.

[INDOOR SPORTS]

Increases the ISO sensitivity and increases the shutter speed to prevent blurring for

indoor photography.

[CREATIVE SPORTS]

The shutter speed (P84) can be changed in the [NORMAL SPORTS] setting.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 90 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

This mode allows you to take close-up pictures of a subject, e.g. when taking pictures of

flowers.

(The distance from the subject when you take close-up pictures differs depending on the

lens you are using.)

Note

•

We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.

• We recommend setting the flash to [Œ] when you take pictures at close range.

• Refer to “About the focus distance reference mark” on P74 for the focus range.

• When a subject is close to the camera, the effective focus range is significantly narrowed.

Therefore, if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the

subject, it may become difficult to focus on it again.

• Close-up Mode gives priority to a subject close to the camera, so it takes longer to focus on the

further subjects.

• When you take pictures at close range, the resolution of the periphery of the picture may

decrease slightly. This is not a malfunction.

• If the lens becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, the lens may not be able to focus on the

subject correctly.

[CLOSE-UP]

[FLOWER]

Flowers outdoors are recorded with natural colors in macro settings. The guide lines

are displayed. (P56)

[FOOD]

You can take pictures of food with a natural hue without being affected by the ambient

light in restaurants etc.

[OBJECTS]

You can take clear and vivid pictures of accessories or small objects in a collection.

[CREATIVE CLOSE-UP]

You can change the degree of blurring of the background by changing the aperture

value in the macro settings. (P84)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 91 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

This allows you to take pictures of a person and the background with near real-life

brightness.

∫ Technique for Night Portrait Mode

•

Since the shutter speed becomes slower, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for

taking pictures.

• When [NIGHT PORTRAIT] is selected, keep the subject still for about 1 second after taking the

picture.

Note

•

Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.

• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is

not a malfunction.

[NIGHT PORTRAIT]

Used when taking photographs of people with night scenery as a background.

•

Open the flash. (You can set to [ ].)

• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].

[NIGHT SCENERY]

Night scenery is vividly photographed with a slow shutter.

•

The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].

[ILLUMINATIONS]

Illuminations are photographed beautifully.

•

The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].

[CREATIVE NIGHT SCENERY]

The aperture value (P84) can be changed in the [NIGHT SCENERY] setting.

•

The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 92 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode: ¿

Taking Pictures that match the Scene being

recorded ( : Scene Mode)

When you select a Scene Mode to match the subject and recording situation, the camera

sets the optimal exposure and hue to obtain the desired picture.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the Scene Mode.

• You can also use the rear dial to select.

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• The menu screen is switched to the recording screen in the

selected Scene Mode.

∫ About the information

•

If you press [DISPLAY] when selecting a Scene Mode in step 2,

explanations about each Scene Mode are displayed. (If you press

[DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the Scene Mode menu.)

Note

•

To change the Scene Mode, press [MENU/SET], and return to above step 2 by pressing 1,

while selecting the Scene Mode menu [ ] by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• The Scene Mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting when the Scene Mode is changed

and then used.

• When you take a picture with a Scene Mode that is not adequate for the purpose, the hue of the

picture may differ from the actual scene.

• The following items cannot be set in Scene Mode because the camera automatically adjusts

them to the optimal setting.

– [SENSITIVITY]/Items other than [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in Film Mode/

[METERING MODE]/[FLASH SYNCHRO]

/[I.RESOLUTION]/[I.EXPOSURE]/

[ISO LIMIT SET]/[DIGITAL ZOOM]

¢ Can be set only when [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS] is set.

Select this when you want to take pictures of a sunset view. This allows you to take vivid

pictures of the red color of the sun.

Note

•

The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].

ï [SUNSET]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 93 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Select this when you want to take pictures at a wedding reception, an indoor party etc.

This allows you to take pictures of people and the background with near real-life

brightness.

∫ Technique for Party Mode

•

Open the flash. (You can set to [ ] or [ ].)

• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for taking pictures.

Note

•

The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].

This takes pictures of a baby with a healthy complexion. When you use the flash, the light

from it is weaker than usual.

It is possible to set different birthdays and names for [BABY1] and [BABY2]. You can

select to have these appear at the time of playback, or have them stamped on the

recorded image using [TEXT STAMP] (P136).

∫ Birthday/Name setting

1 Press 3/4 to select [AGE] or [NAME] and then press 1.

2 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Enter the birthday or name.

•

When the birthday or name is set, [AGE] or [NAME] is automatically set to [ON].

• If [ON] is selected when the birthday or name has not been registered, the setting screen

appears automatically.

4 Press [MENU/SET] to finish.

•

You can also use the rear dial to set.

∫ To cancel [AGE] and [NAME]

Select the [OFF] setting in step

2 of the “Birthday/Name setting” procedure.

Note

• The age and name can be printed out using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” bundled software on the

CD-ROM (supplied).

• If [AGE] or [NAME] is set to [OFF] even when the birthday or name has been set, the age or

name will not be displayed. Before taking pictures, set [AGE] or [NAME] to [ON].

• Intelligent ISO sensitivity control is activated, and maximum ISO sensitivity level becomes

[ISO400].

• If the camera is turned on with [BABY1]/[BABY2] set, the age and name are displayed at the

lower left of the screen for about 5 seconds, along with the current date and time.

• If the age is not properly displayed, check the clock and birthday settings.

• The Birthday Setting and Name Setting can be reset with [RESET].

• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].

2 [PARTY]

: [BABY1]/; [BABY2]

Birthday: 2/1: Select the items (year/month/day).

3/4: Setting.

[MENU/SET]: Exit.

Name: For details on how to enter characters, refer to

“Entering Text” on P129.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 94 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Select this when you want to take pictures of a pet such as a dog or a cat.

You can set your pet’s birthday and name. You can select to have these appear at the time

of playback, or have them stamped on the recorded image using [TEXT STAMP] (P136).

For information about [AGE] or [NAME], refer to [BABY1]/[BABY2] on P94.

Note

•

The initial setting for the AF Assist Lamp is [OFF].

• Intelligent ISO sensitivity control is activated, and maximum ISO sensitivity level becomes

[ISO800].

• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [ ].

• Refer to [BABY1]/[BABY2] for other information about this mode.

This mode makes it easy to pick out the subject on which to focus and blurs the

background to make the subject stand out.

∫ Setting the AF area

1 Move the AF area using 3/4/2/1.

•

You can position the AF area anywhere on the screen (except at the edges).

• Press [‚] to return the AF area to the center of the screen.

2 Take the picture.

Note

•

Quick AF is performed automatically.

• Set the [WHITE BALANCE] (P76), the [Fn BUTTON SET] (P123) using the Quick Menu (P30).

• AF area setting screen is displayed by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• The obtained effects will differ depending on factors such as the distance to the subject and

background, and the type of lens used. For best results, we recommend getting as close as

possible to the subject when taking pictures. (P74)

í [PET]

[PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 95 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures while Adjusting Color

( : My Color Mode)

You can take pictures with a desired effect by previewing the subject on the LCD monitor

or viewfinder

(Live View) and setting the desired effect.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Press 2/1 to select an item.

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

¢For [CUSTOM] settings, refer to page 97.

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

• Recording screen is displayed.

∫ Readjust the My Color settings

Return to above step 2 by pressing rear dial or one of 3/4/2/1.

• [Fn BUTTON SET] (P123) or [AF MODE] (P69) cannot be set with 4/2. Make the setting with

the Quick Menu (P30).

Item Effect

[EXPRESSIVE] This is a pop art style image effect that emphasizes the color.

[RETRO]

This is a soft image effect that gives the appearance of a tarnished

photograph.

[PURE]

This is an image effect that uses a cool, bright light to give a feeling

of freshness. (The image will come out bright and slightly bluish.)

[ELEGANT]

This is an image effect that creates a tranquil atmosphere and

projects a feeling of stateliness.

(The image will come out slightly dark and amberish.)

[MONOCHROME]

This is an image effect that captures the subject using tones

characteristic of black and white photography, and with a whisper of

color.

[DYNAMIC ART]

This is an impressive image effect that adjusts dark areas and bright

areas to appropriate brightness, together with enhancements on

colors.

[SILHOUETTE]

This is an image effect that enhances the subject in the shade as a

black silhouette by using the background colors of the sky or sunset

etc.

[CUSTOM]

The color effects can be set according to your preferences.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 96 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Note

•

My Color settings are memorized even if the camera is turned off.

• Auto Bracket cannot be used in My Color Mode.

• ISO sensitivity will be fixed to [AUTO].

• [I.EXPOSURE], [COLOR SPACE] can be set only when the My Color Mode is set to

[CUSTOM].

• The following items cannot be set in My Color Mode because the camera automatically adjusts

them to the optimal setting.

– [FILM MODE]/[FLASH]/[FLASH SYNCHRO]/[ISO LIMIT SET]

By selecting [CUSTOM], you can take pictures with color, brightness and saturation

adjusted to desired levels.

In step 2 on P96, select [CUSTOM] and press [MENU/SET].

Press 3/4 to select an item and 2/1 to adjust.

• You can also use the rear dial to set.

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

• Recording screen is displayed.

∫ Return [CUSTOM] settings to default

1 Select [RESET] in above step 2.

2 Press 2 to select [YES] and press [MENU/SET].

•

Adjusted value for each item returns to standard (center point).

Note

•

Adjustments made with [CUSTOM] are not in effect in other Recording Modes.

• Icons for the adjusted items are displayed in the screen when the [CUSTOM] are adjusted.

Displayed icon is the one for direction of adjustment.

• AF Tracking may not function if you adjust [SATURATION] to make the color lighter.

Adjusting the custom settings to achieve desired effects

Item Adjustment contents

[COLOR]

This will adjust the color of the image from red light to blue

light. (11 steps in n5)

[BRIGHTNESS]

This will adjust the brightness of the image.

(11 steps in n5)

[SATURATION]

This will adjust the color intensity of the image from black

and white to vivid color.

(11 steps in n5)

[RESET]

Return all settings to default

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 97 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Registering Personal Menu Settings

(Registering custom settings)

It is possible to register up to 3 sets of current camera settings as custom sets.

•

Set to the mode dial to the desired mode and select the desired menu settings in advance.

Select [CUST. SET MEM.] in the [CUSTOM] menu. (P28)

Press 3/4 to select the custom set to register

and then press [MENU/SET].

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press

[MENU/SET].

• When [YES] is selected, the settings that were previously

stored are overwritten.

• You cannot save the following menu items because they affect

other Recording Modes.

–[CLOCK SET], [TRAVEL DATE], [NO.RESET], [RESET], [LANGUAGE] and

[SCENE MENU]

–[BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] birthday and name settings in Scene Mode

–Data registered with [FACE RECOG.]

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 98 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking Pictures in Custom Mode

You can select one of your own custom settings saved with [CUST. SET MEM.] to suit the

picture-taking conditions.

Initial setting of the Program AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

A Display custom settings

Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu.

Press 3/4 to select the custom settings you want

to use.

• Press 1 to display the settings for each menu item. (Press [‚]

to return to the selection screen.)

• Only some of the menu items are displayed. (Refer to the

following for the menu items that are displayed.)

Press [MENU/SET] to enter the settings.

A Saving of the selected custom settings is displayed on the screen.

∫ When changing the menu settings

Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily with [ SET1], [ SET2] or

[ SET3] selected, what has been registered will remain unchanged.

To change what has been registered, overwrite the registered data using [CUST. SET

MEM.] (P98) on the [CUSTOM] menu.

Note

•

You cannot register the settings of the following menu items as a Custom Mode. If they are

changed, other Recording Modes will also be affected.

– [CLOCK SET], [TRAVEL DATE], [NO.RESET], [RESET], [LANGUAGE] and [SCENE MENU]

– [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] birthday and name settings in Scene Mode

– Data registered with [FACE RECOG.]

[AF/AE LOCK] [PRE AF]

[AF/AE LOCK HOLD] [Fn BUTTON SET]

[AF+MF]

[AUTO REVIEW]

[FOCUS PRIORITY] [LONG SHTR NR]

[AF ASSIST LAMP] [SHOOT W/O LENS]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 99 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

100

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode: ( only when the mode dial is set to [ ])

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Motion Picture Mode

The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are

using, and

the operational sound of the lens may be recorded.

Refer to page 16 for details.

Set the mode dial to [n].

• If the [¦] button is pressed with the mode dial set to [n], it becomes a motion picture

reflecting the settings of Intelligent Auto Mode. (P101)

Set the Focus Mode.

∫ About the Focus Mode settings

Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the [CONTINUOUS AF]

setting (P123) in the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu.

• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, operational sound may be recorded when

the Auto Focus is operated while recording a motion picture. It is recommended to record with

[CONTINUOUS AF] (P123) set to [OFF], if the sound of operation bothers you to avoid

recording the lens noise.

Focus Mode [CONTINUOUS AF] Settings

AFS/AFC

You can have the camera focus

continuously. Alternatively, you can

have the camera focus when you

press the shutter button halfway.

OFF

You can have the camera focus when

the shutter button is pressed halfway.

You can focus manually.

OFF

Press the shutter button halfway to focus

and then press it fully to start recording.

A Elapsed recording time

B Available recording time

• After pressing the shutter button fully, release it

straight away.

• The audio is also recorded simultaneously from the

built-in microphone on this unit. (Motion pictures

cannot be recorded without audio.)

• The recording state indicator (red) C will flash while recording motion pictures.

• Press the shutter button halfway when it is difficult to focus on the subject.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 100 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

101

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ About the Flicker Reduction Function

If there is marked flicker or striping when recording motion pictures, the Flicker Reduction

Function can be set to [ON].

1 Press [‚].

•

The Flicker Reduction Function will be forcefully activated, and the shutter speed will be

adjusted to 1/100.

2 Rotate the rear dial.

•

It is possible to select the shutter speed to adjust from 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, or 1/120, and

adjust to the optimal setting while viewing the screen.

• When Intelligent Auto Mode is selected in step 1, motion picture recording matching to the

subject or recording situation can be performed.

∫ Scene detection

When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon of the scene concerned is

displayed in blue for 2 seconds, after which its color changes to the usual red.

•

[¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard settings are set.

• When [ ] is selected, the camera automatically detects a person’s face, and it will adjust the

focus and exposure. (Face Detection) (P70)

Note

•

Refer to P41 for settings in Intelligent Auto Mode.

• Due to conditions such as the ones below, a different scene may be identified for the same

subject.

– Subject conditions: When the face is bright or dark, the size of the subject, the color of the

subject, the distance to the subject, the contrast of the subject, when the subject is moving

– Recording conditions: Sunset, Sunrise, under low brightness conditions, when the camera is

shaken, when zoom is used

Press the shutter button fully to stop recording.

• Sound will be heard when pressing the shutter button fully indicating start/stop of motion

picture recording.

Sound volume can be set in [BEEP] (P31).

• If the card becomes full in the middle of recording, the camera stops recording

automatically.

When set to Intelligent Auto Mode

[i-PORTRAIT]

[i-SCENERY]

[i-LOW LIGHT]

[i-MACRO]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 101 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

102

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].

¢This item cannot be set in the Intelligent Auto Mode.

• [ ] can be enjoyed on the TV as high quality motion picture by using the HDMI mini

cable (optional). For details, see

“Playing back on the TV with HDMI socket” on P147.

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Note

•

Refer to P122 for the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu.

• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].

• Use a card with SD Speed Class

with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures.

¢ SD Speed Class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing.

• Refer to P185 for information about the available recording time.

• The available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease regularly.

• Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after

recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.

• When recording a motion picture, do not cover the microphone with your fingers or other

objects.

• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated

during the recording of a motion picture.

• The screen may be blacked out momentarily, or the unit may record noise due to static

electricity or electromagnetic waves etc. depending on the environment of the motion picture

recording.

• When operating the zoom when recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into focus.

• When the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] is set to [ON], the angle of view will change when the screen is

switched between the still picture screen and motion picture screen, because the zoom factor is

different between still pictures and motion pictures. (P47)

• The ISO sensitivity will be set to [AUTO] when recording motion pictures.

• When recording a motion picture, [STABILIZER] will be fixed to [MODE1] even if it is set to

[MODE2] or [MODE3].

• Set the [FILM MODE] by using the Quick Menu (P30).

• When recording motion pictures, the following functions cannot be used.

– [ ] in the AF Mode

(It will switch to Multi Auto Focus Mode for motion pictures.)

– Direction Detection Function

– [FACE RECOG.]

Changing the settings for the recording quality

Select [REC QUALITY] from the

[MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu, and press 1.

(P28)

Item Picture size fps Aspect ratio

([HD]) 1280k720 pixels 30

16:9

([WVGA]) 848k480 pixels 30

([VGA]) 640k480 pixels 30

4:3

([QVGA]) 320k240 pixels 30

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 102 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

103

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor (P161) when recording motion

pictures.

• If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor (P161) the power supply is cut off due

to a power cut or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will

not be recorded.

• Color or brightness of the screen may change or horizontal streaks may appear on the screen

when the picture is taken under extremely bright light, or under fluorescent lamps, mercury

lamps, or sodium lamps etc.

• The motion picture recording may stop in the middle when any of the following cards are used.

–Cards on which recording and deleting have been repeated many times

–Cards which have been formatted using a PC or other equipment

Before taking pictures, format (P35) the card in the unit. Because formatting will delete all data

recorded on the card, save important data beforehand on the computer.

• You may not be able to record for a short while after turning the power [ON] when using a large

capacity card.

• When motion pictures recorded with the camera are played back on other equipment, the

quality of the picture and sound may deteriorate and it may not be possible to play them back.

Also the recording information may not be displayed correctly.

• Sound from motion pictures or pictures with audio recorded by this camera cannot be played

back by older models of Panasonic digital camera (LUMIX) launched before July 2008.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 103 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

104

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Taking a Picture with Face Recognition Function

Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and

prioritizes focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the

back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

•

The Face Recognition function includes the following.

In Recording Mode

–

Display of corresponding name when camera detects a registered

face

(if name has been set for the registered face)

–The camera will remember the face that has been photographed

many times and display the registration screen automatically

(if [AUTO REGISTRATION] is set to [ON])

In Playback Mode

–Display of name and age (if information has been registered)

–Selective playback of pictures chosen from pictures registered with Face Recognition

([CATEGORY PLAY] (P133))

¢ Names of up to 3 people are displayed. Precedence for the names displayed when taking

pictures is determined according to the order of registration.

Note

•

[FACE RECOG.] only works when [AF MODE] is set to [š].

• During the Burst Mode, [FACE RECOG.] picture information can be attached to only the first

picture.

• After pressing the shutter halfway down, a different person’s picture information may be added

when the camera is turned to a different subject to photograph.

• [FACE RECOG.] cannot be used with the [FOOD] in [CLOSE-UP], [NIGHT SCENERY] and

[ILLUMINATIONS] in [NIGHT PORTRAIT], [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS] in Scene Mode.

• When the Focus Mode is set to [MF], automatic registration is not available.

• The data registered with [FACE RECOG.] will be reset when the [REC] menu settings are reset

with [RESET].

• [FACE RECOG.] will find a face similar to the registered face, and does not guarantee secure

recognition of a person.

• Face Recognition may take more time to select and recognize distinctive facial features than

regular face detection.

• Even when face recognition information has been registered, pictures taken with [NAME] set to

[OFF] will not be categorized by face recognition in [CATEGORY PLAY].

• Even when face recognition information is changed (P108), face recognition information for the

pictures already taken will not be changed.

For instance, if the name is changed, pictures recorded before the change will not be

categorized by face recognition in [CATEGORY PLAY].

• To change the name information of the pictures taken, perform the [REPLACE] in

[FACE REC EDIT] (P145).

[FACE RECOG.] is initially set to [OFF] on the camera.

[FACE RECOG.] will turn [ON] automatically when the face image is registered.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 104 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

105

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to 6

people.

Registration can be facilitated by taking multiple face images of each person. (up to 3

pictures/registration)

Face Settings

∫ Point of recording when registering the face images

•

Face front with eyes open and mouth closed, making sure the

outline of the face, the eyes, or the eyebrows are not covered

with the hair when registering.

• Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when

registering. (Flash will not flash during registration.)

(Good example for

registering)

∫ When it is not recognising during recording

• Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors, or with different expressions or

angles. (P108)

• Additionally register at the location of recording.

• Changing the [SENSITIVITY] setting. (P108)

• When a person who is registered is not recognized, correct by re-registering.

Example of faces that are hard to recognize

Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognize

faces correctly even for registered faces in the following

instances, depending on the facial expression and environment.

• Hair is covering the eyes or the eyebrows (A)

• The face is dark/the light is at an angle (B)

• The face is facing in angle or sideways

• The face is facing upward/downward

• The eyes are closed

• When the face is extremely bright or dark

• Hidden by sunglasses, glasses reflecting light, hair, hat, etc.

• When the face appears small on the screen

• The entire face is not in the screen

• When distinctive facial features have changed with age

• When parents and children or siblings closely resemble one

another

• Facial expression is very different

• When there is little contrast on the faces

• When there is rapid movement

• When the camera is shaking

• When Digital Zoom is used

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 105 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

106

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Select [FACE RECOG.] on the [REC] Mode menu and then press 1.

(P28)

Press 3

4 to select [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET].

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the face

recognition frame that is not registered,

and then press [MENU/SET].

Take the picture adjusting the face with

the guide.

• The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.)

cannot be registered.

• When recognition fails, a message will appear and

the display will return to the recording screen. In this

case, try taking the picture again.

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].

Registering face image of new person

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 106 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

107

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Select item to edit with 3/4, and then press 1.

• You can register up to 3 face images.

Press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

∫ About the information

•

When [DISPLAY] is pressed on the recording screen described in step 4 on P106, an

explanation appears for taking face images. (Press again to return to the recording screen.)

Item Description of settings

[NAME]

It is possible to register names.

1 Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Enter the name.

•

For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

section on P129.

[AGE]

It is possible to register the birthday.

1 Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 2/1 to select the items (Year/Month/Day), and

then press 3/4 to set and then press [MENU/SET].

[ADD IMAGES]

To add additional face images.

(

Add Images)

1 Select the unregistered face recognition frame, and then

press [MENU/SET].

2 Perform steps 4 and 5 in “Registering face image of new

person”.

3 Press [‚].

To delete one of the face images.

(Delete)

1 Press 2/1 to select the face image to delete, and then

press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press [‚].

•

If there is only one image registered, it cannot be deleted.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 107 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

108

Advanced (Recording pictures)

You can modify the pictures or information of an already registered person. You can also

delete the information of the registered person.

1 Select [FACE RECOG.] from the [REC] Mode menu, and

then press 1. (P28)

2 Press 4 to select [MEMORY] and press [MENU/SET].

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the face image to edit or delete

and then press [MENU/SET].

4 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].

5 Press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Setting of Auto Registration and Sensitivity for Face Recognition can be done.

1 Select [FACE RECOG.] from the [REC] Mode menu, and then press 1. (P28)

2 Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press 1.

4 Press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

Change or delete the information for a registered person

Item Description of settings

[INFO EDIT]

Changing the information of an already registered person.

Perform step

6 in “Registering face image of new

person”.

[PRIORITY]

The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for

higher-priority faces.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the priority and then press

[MENU/SET].

[DELETE]

Deleting information of a registered person.

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].

Setting Auto Registration/Sensitivity

Item Description of settings

[AUTO REGISTRATION]

[OFF]/[ON]

•

When the [AUTO REGISTRATION] is set to [ON],

[FACE RECOG.] will be set to [ON] automatically.

• For details, see “Auto Registration” on P109.

[SENSITIVITY]

[HIGH]/[NORMAL]/[LOW]

•

Select [HIGH] when recognition proves to be difficult. The

likelihood of recognition increases, but so does the likelihood

of mistaken recognition.

• Select [LOW] when mistaken recognition happens frequently.

• To return to the original settings, select [NORMAL].

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 108 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

109

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

When [AUTO REGISTRATION] is set to [ON], the registration screen will display

automatically after taking a picture of a face that has a high number of appearances.

•

Registration screen is displayed after approximately 3 pictures. (It is not counted when

Burst

Mode

, Auto Bracket, White Balance Bracket, Multi Film Bracket or [AUDIO REC.] is set.)

• It may be extremely hard to recognize only with [AUTO REGISTRATION], so register the face

images with [FACE RECOG.] in the [REC] Mode menu beforehand.

∫ Registering from the automatic registration screen

1 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].

•

If there are no registered persons, proceed to step 3.

• Selection screen is displayed again when [NO] is selected, and

when [YES] is selected with

3, [AUTO REGISTRATION] will be

set to [OFF].

2 Press 3/4 to select [NEW PERSON] or

[ADDITIONAL IMAGE] and then press [MENU/SET].

•

After additionally registering or changing a face image, the screen returns automatically to

the recording screen.

3 Perform the operation in Step 6 and following in “Registering face image of new

person”.

Note

•

If the registration screen will not display, it may display easier by recording in the same

conditions or with the same expressions.

• If a face is not recognized even though it is registered, it will make the recognition easier by

registering the person again using the [FACE RECOG.] in the [REC] Mode menu in that

environment.

• If the registration screen is displayed for a person that is already registered, it will make the

recognition easier by additionally registering.

• It may make recognition harder when a picture recorded with flash is registered.

Auto Registration

Item Description of settings

[NEW PERSON]

• A list of registered people is displayed when there are 6 people

already registered. Select the person to be replaced.

[ADDITIONAL IMAGE]

To additionally register a face image for a registered person.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to whom you wish

add the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].

•

If 3 images have already been registered, the picture

replacement screen will appear. In this case, select the picture

you wish to replace.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 109 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

110

Advanced (Recording pictures)

[REC] Mode:

Useful Functions at Travel Destinations

For details on the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P28.

If you set the departure date or the travel destination of the vacation in advance, the

number of days that have passed since the departure date (which day of the vacation it is)

is recorded when you take the picture. You can display the number of days that have

passed when playing back the pictures and stamp it on the recorded pictures with [TEXT

STAMP] (P136).

•

The number of days that have passed since the departure date can be printed out using the

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied).

• Select [CLOCK SET] to set the current date and time in advance. (P26)

Recording which Day of the Vacation You Take the Picture

Select [TRAVEL DATE] from the [SETUP] menu,

and then press 1.

Press 3 to select [TRAVEL SETUP] and then press

Press 4 to select [SET] and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press 3/4/2/1 to set the departure date

(year/month/day), and then press [MENU/SET].

Press 3/4/2/1 to set the return date (year/

month/day), and then press [MENU/SET].

• If you do not want to set the return date, press [MENU/SET]

while the date bar is displayed.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 110 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

111

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

∫ Canceling the travel date

The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date. If you

want to cancel the travel date before the end of the vacation, select [OFF] on the screen

shown in step

3 or 7 and then press [MENU/SET] twice. If the [TRAVEL SETUP] is set to

[OFF] in step

3, [LOCATION] will be also set to [OFF].

Note

•

The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set.

If you set [WORLD TIME] (P112) to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the

date in the clock setting and the travel destination setting.

• The travel date setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off.

• If [TRAVEL DATE] is set to [OFF], the number of days that have passed since the departure

date will not be recorded. Even if [TRAVEL DATE] is set to [SET] after taking the pictures,

which day of the vacation you took them is not displayed.

• If you set a departure date and then take a picture on a date before this departure date, [-]

(minus) is displayed in orange and the day of the vacation that you took the picture is not

recorded.

• If the travel date is displayed as [-] (minus) in white, there is a time difference that involves date

change between the [HOME] and [DESTINATION]. (It will be recorded)

• [LOCATION] cannot be recorded when taking motion pictures.

• [TRAVEL DATE] cannot be set in the Intelligent Auto Mode. Setting of other Recording Mode

will be reflected.

Press 4 to select [LOCATION] and then press 1.

Press 4 to select [SET] and then press

[MENU/SET].

Enter the location.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” on P129.

Press [MENU/SET] twice to close the menu.

Take a picture.

• The number of days that have passed since the departure date is displayed for about

5 seconds if this unit is turned on etc. after setting the travel date or when the travel date

is set.

• When the travel date is set, [—] appears on the lower right of the screen.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 111 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

112

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P28.

You can display the local times at the travel destinations and record them on the pictures

you take.

•

Select [CLOCK SET] to set the current date and time in advance. (P26)

Note

•

Return the setting to [HOME] when the vacation is finished by performing steps 1, 2 and 3.

• If [HOME] is already set, change only the travel destination, and use.

• If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time

difference from the home area.

Recording Dates/Times at Overseas Travel Destinations (World Time)

Select [WORLD TIME] from the [SETUP] menu,

and then press 1.

•

When first using the camera after purchasing it, the [PLEASE

SET THE HOME AREA] message appears. Press

[MENU/SET], and set the home area on the screen in step

Press 4 to select [HOME], and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then

press [MENU/SET].

A Current time

B Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)

• If daylight saving time [ ] is used at the home area,

press 3. Press 3 again to return to the original time.

•

The daylight saving time setting for the home area does not

advance the current time. Advance the clock setting by one hour.

Press 3 to select [DESTINATION] and then

press [MENU/SET] to set.

C Depending on the setting, the time at the travel destination

area or the home area is displayed.

Press

to select the area the travel destination

is in and then press [MENU/SET] to set.

D Current time of the destination area

E Time difference

• If daylight saving time [ ] is used at the travel

destination, press 3. (The time advances by one hour.)

Press 3 again to return to the original time.

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 112 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

113

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Using the [REC] Mode Menu

• [METERING MODE], [I.EXPOSURE], [EX. OPT. ZOOM], and [DIGITAL ZOOM] are common to

both the [REC] Mode menu and [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu. Changing these settings in

one of these menus is reflected in other menu.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can select color characteristics for your pictures from among 9 sets, much as you

would select a film for a film camera.

Select the Film Mode setting according to the conditions and the nature of the recording.

Applicable modes:

[You can only select [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in [ ], [¿], [ ], [ ], [ ],

[ ] and [ ] Mode.]

[STANDARD] (COLOR)/[DYNAMIC] (COLOR)/[SMOOTH] (COLOR)/[NATURE] (COLOR)/

[NOSTALGIC] (COLOR)/[VIBRANT] (COLOR)/[STANDARD] ( )/[DYNAMIC] ( )/

[SMOOTH] ( )/[MY FILM 1]/[MY FILM 2]/[MULTI FILM]

Note

•

Refer to P81 for details.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback

method.

Applicable modes:

Note

•

The ends of the recorded pictures may be cut at printing so check before printing. (P179)

[FILM MODE]

? [ASPECT RATIO]

[X]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a 4:3 TV

[Y]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a 35 mm film camera

[W]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a high-definition TV, etc.

[]: Square aspect ratio

[X][Y][W][]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 113 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

114

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Set the number of pixels. The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the

pictures will appear even when they are printed onto large sheets.

Applicable modes:

∫ When the aspect ratio is [X].

∫ When the aspect ratio is [Y].

∫ When the aspect ratio is [W].

∫ When the aspect ratio is [ ].

Note

•

If you set [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (P120) to [ON], [ ] is displayed on the screen when the picture

size is set to a size other than the maximum picture size for each aspect ratio. “EZ” is an

abbreviation of “Extended Optical Zoom”.

• A digital picture is made of numerous dots called pixels. The

higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the picture will be

when it is printed on a large piece of paper or displayed on a

PC monitor.

A Many pixels (Fine)

B Few pixels (Rough)

¢ These pictures are examples to show the effect.

• If you change the aspect ratio, set the picture size again.

• Refer to P181 for information about the number of recordable pictures.

@ [PICTURE SIZE]

(12M) 4000k3000 pixels

(6M) 2816k2112 pixels

(3M) 2048k1536 pixels

(10.5M) 4000k2672 pixels

(5M) 2816k1880 pixels

(2.5M) 2048k1360 pixels

(9M) 4000k2248 pixels

(4.5M) 2816k1584 pixels

(2M) 1920k1080 pixels

(9M) 2992k2992 pixels

(4.5M) 2112k2112 pixels

(2M) 1504k1504 pixels

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 114 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

115

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.

Applicable modes:

¢1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG image will also be

deleted.

¢2 It is fixed to maximum recordable pixels ([L]) for each image aspect ratio.

Note

•

Refer to P181 for information about the number of recordable pictures.

• You can enjoy more advanced picture editing if you use RAW files. You can save RAW files in a

file format (JPEG, TIFF etc.) that can be displayed on your PC etc., develop them and edit them

using the software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory on the CD-ROM

(supplied).

• [ ] images are recorded with a smaller data volume than [ ] or [ ].

• [PRINT SET] and [FAVORITE] cannot be set to a picture taken by [ ].

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Specify a person’s face and use the face recognition functions.

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[ON]/

[MEMORY]/[SET]

Note

•

Refer to P104 for details.

A [QUALITY]

[A]: Fine (when giving priority to the picture quality)

[›]: Standard (when using the standard picture quality and increasing the number of

pictures to be recorded without changing the number of pixels)

[]:RAWiFine

(In addition to the [RAW] settings, a fine-equivalent JPEG image is

simultaneously created.)

¢1

[]:RAWiStandard

(In addition to the [RAW] settings, a standard-equivalent JPEG

image is simultaneously created.)

¢1

[]: RAW file (When the image is to be edited with a PC in high quality)

¢2

[FACE RECOG.]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 115 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

116

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Using one of these modes, jitter during picture taking is detected, and the camera

automatically compensates the jitter, enabling jitter-free images to be taken.

Applicable modes:

Note

¢This can be selected only when using a lens without the [O.I.S.] switch.

–There is no [O.I.S.] switch on the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K.

• Confirm that the [O.I.S.] switch on the lens is set to [ON] when using a lens with the [O.I.S.]

switch.

• [STABILIZER] cannot be selected when a lens without Stabilizer function is used.

• The stabilizer function may not be effective in the following cases.

– When there is a lot of jitter.

– When the zoom magnification is high.

– When using the Digital Zoom.

– When taking pictures while following a moving subject.

– When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places.

Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button.

• The panning effect in [MODE3] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases.

– In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day

– When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100th of a second.

– When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly. (The

background will not become a blur.)

– When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily

• We recommend taking pictures with the viewfinder when panning in [MODE3].

• The setting is fixed to [MODE1] even if it is set to [MODE2] or [MODE3] in recording motion

pictures.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can switch the flash setting.

Applicable modes:

[

‡]/[ ]/[‰]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

Note

•

Refer to P57 for details.

[STABILIZER]

[OFF]

[MODE1]: Jitter is always compensated during [REC] Mode.

[MODE2]: The jitter is compensated for when the shutter button is pressed.

[MODE3]: Camera shake is corrected for up/down movements. This mode is ideal for

panning (a method of taking pictures which involves turning the camera to

track the movements of a subject which continues to move in a fixed

direction).

[FLASH]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 116 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

117

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

When the flash is used with the Red-Eye Reduction ([ ], [ ], [ ]) selected, it

will automatically detect and correct the red-eye in the image data.

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[ON]

Note

•

It may not be able to correct the red-eye depending on the recording conditions.

• When the Digital Red-Eye correction is set to [ON], [ ] appears on the flash icon.

• Refer to P59 for details.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can set to the 2nd curtain synchro.

Applicable modes:

[1ST]/[2ND]

Note

•

Refer to P62 for details.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can adjust the flash output.

Applicable modes:

[s2EV]/[s12/3EV]/[s11/3EV]/[s1EV]/[s2/3 EV]/[s1/3 EV]/[0 EV]/[r1/3 EV]/

[r2/3 EV]/[r1EV]/[r1 1/3 EV]/[r12/3EV]/[r2 EV]

Note

•

Refer to P61 for details.

[RED-EYE REMOVAL]

[FLASH SYNCHRO]

[FLASH ADJUST.]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 117 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

118

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.

Applicable modes:

Note

•

When the AF Mode is set to [š] while [C] is selected, exposure is adjusted to the face of a

person, and when it is set to [ ], exposure is adjusted to the locked subject.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Pictures with sharp profile and resolution can be taken by utilising the Intelligent

Resolution Technology.

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[LOW]/[STANDARD]/[HIGH]

Note

•

[I.RESOLUTION] is fixed to [OFF] in Motion Picture Mode.

C [METERING MODE]

[C]: Multiple

This is the method in which the camera measures the most

suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the

whole screen automatically. Usually, we recommend using this

method.

[ ]: Center weighted

This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center

of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.

[Ù]: Spot

This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering

target A.

[I.RESOLUTION]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 118 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

119

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Contrast and exposure will be adjusted automatically when there is a big difference in

brightness between the background and subject, to bring the image close to how you see.

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[LOW]/[STANDARD]/[HIGH]

Note

•

Even when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ISO100]/[ISO125], [SENSITIVITY] may be set higher

than [ISO100]/[ISO125] if the picture is taken with [I.EXPOSURE] set to valid.

• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the conditions.

• [ ] in the screen turns to yellow when [I.EXPOSURE] is in effect.

• [LOW], [STANDARD], or [HIGH] represents the maximum range of effect.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

It will select optimal ISO sensitivity with set value as limit depending on the brightness of

the subject.

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]

Note

•

The upper limit of the ISO sensitivity can be set.

• The higher the value set for the ISO sensitivity, the more the jitter is reduced but the greater the

amount of picture noise.

• It will work when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [AUTO] or [ ].

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

ISO sensitivity settings between [ISO100] and [ISO6400] are changed for every 1/3 EV.

Applicable modes:

Note

•

When the setting is changed from [1/3 EV] to [1 EV], ISO sensitivity will be set to value closest

to the value set during the [1/3 EV]. (Set value will not restore when the setting is changed back

to [1/3 EV]. It will stay as the setting selected for [1 EV].)

[I.EXPOSURE] (Intelligent exposure adjustment)

[ISO LIMIT SET]

[ISO INCREMENTS]

[1/3 EV]: [100]/[125]/[160]/[200]/[250]/[320]/[400]/[500]/[640]/[800]/[1000]/[1250]/

[1600]/[2000]/[2500]/[3200]/[4000]/[5000]/[6400]

[1 EV]: [100]/[200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 119 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

120

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes

slower to take pictures of night scenery etc. so you can take beautiful pictures.

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[ON]

Note

•

If you set [ON], the countdown screen is displayed when the shutter button is pressed. Do not

move the camera at this time. After the countdown is finished, [PLEASE WAIT...] is displayed

for the same time as the selected shutter speed for signal processing.

• We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slowed to take pictures.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Enlarging a picture with no picture quality deterioration

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[ON]

Note

•

Refer to P47 for details.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

This can enlarge subjects even more than the Optical Zoom or Extended Optical Zoom.

Applicable modes:

[OFF]/[2t]/[4t]

Note

•

Refer to P47 for details.

• If camera shake (jitter) is a problem during zooming, it is recommended that [STABILIZER] be

set to [MODE1].

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can set the burst speed.

Applicable modes:

[H]/[M]/[L]

Note

•

Refer to P64 for details.

[LONG SHTR NR]

[EX. OPT. ZOOM]

) [DIGITAL ZOOM]

[BURST RATE]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 120 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

121

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can set the compensation range of the exposure and the bracket order.

Applicable modes:

Note

•

Refer to P66 for details.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can set the time for the self-timer.

Applicable modes:

[]/[]/[]

Note

•

Refer to P68 for details.

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Set this when you want to correct the color reproduction of the recorded pictures on a PC,

printer etc.

Applicable modes:

Note

•

Depending on the color space setting, the file name of the recorded picture changes as shown.

• Set to sRGB if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.

• The setting is fixed to [sRGB] when recording motion pictures.

[AUTO BRACKET]

[STEP]: [3•1/3]/[3•2/3]/[5•1/3]/[5•2/3]/[7•1/3]/[7•2/3]

[SEQUENCE]:[0/j/i]/[j/0/i]

[SELF-TIMER]

[COLOR SPACE]

[sRGB]: Color space is set to sRGB color space.

This is widely used in computer related equipment.

[AdobeRGB]: Color space is set to AdobeRGB color space.

AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional

printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB.

: sRGB

: AdobeRGB

P1000001.JPG

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 121 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

122

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [REC] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

Audio can be recorded simultaneously with the image. You can record the conversation

during the shooting or the situation as a memo.

Applicable modes:

•

If you press [MENU/SET] during audio recording, the audio recording is canceled.

Note

•

Audio is recorded from the built-in microphone on the camera.

• When recording audio, do not cover the microphone with your fingers or other objects.

• Audio recorded with this unit may not playback on other equipment.

• Sound from motion pictures or pictures with audio recorded by this camera cannot be played

back by older models of Panasonic digital camera (LUMIX) launched before July 2008.

• [AUDIO REC.] cannot be set in the following cases.

– When recording with Auto Bracket

– During burst shooting

– When [SELF-TIMER] is set to []

–

When recording with White Balance Bracket

– When recording with Multi Film Bracket

– When [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

Using the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode Menu

• The [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu is only displayed when in Motion Picture Mode.

• [METERING MODE], [I.EXPOSURE], [EX. OPT. ZOOM], and [DIGITAL ZOOM] are common to

both the [REC] Mode menu and [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu. Changing these settings in

one of these menus is reflected in other menu.

–For details, refer to the explanation for the corresponding setting in [REC] Mode menu.

For details on [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

This sets up the picture quality of motion pictures.

Applicable modes:

( only when the mode dial is set to [ ])

[]/[ ]

/[ ]/[ ]

¢ This item cannot be set in the Intelligent Auto Mode.

Note

•

Refer to P102 for details.

B [AUDIO REC.]

[OFF]: Audio will not be recorded.

[ON]: [B] is displayed on the screen.

Audio will be recorded as soon as the image is recorded.

(It will stop in 5 seconds)

[REC QUALITY]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 122 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

123

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

For details on [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

You can set the camera to always maintain the focus or fix the focus.

Applicable modes:

( only when the mode dial is set to [ ])

[OFF]/[ON]

Note

•

Set to [OFF] when you would like to fix the focus.

• It is recommended to set the Auto Focus to [OFF] if the sound of operation bothers you.

For details on [MOTION PICTURE] Mode menu settings, refer to P28.

This reduces the wind noise in the audio recording.

Applicable modes:

( only when the mode dial is set to [ ])

[OFF]/[LOW]/[STANDARD]/[HIGH]

Note

•

Sound quality will be different than usual when [WIND CUT] is set.

• [WIND CUT] does not function when taking still pictures with audio.

Perform these settings if you need to.

Using the [CUSTOM] Menu

• In the Intelligent Auto Mode, only [GUIDE LINE] can be set.

For details on how to select the [CUSTOM] menu settings, refer to P28.

•

Refer to P98 for details.

• Refer to P113 for details about [REC] Mode menu.

• When [DIRECT AF AREA] (P125) is set to [ON], the operations on the cursor buttons translate

to movements of the AF area. Set using the Quick Menu (P30).

[CONTINUOUS AF]

[WIND CUT]

[CUST. SET MEM.]

Up to 3 current camera settings can be registered as custom settings.

[]

[Fn BUTTON SET]

Assign [REC] Mode menu or [CUSTOM] menu to 4 button. It is

convenient to register functions that are used often.

[FILM MODE]/[ASPECT RATIO]/[QUALITY]/

[METERING MODE]/[I.RESOLUTION]/[I.EXPOSURE]/

[EX. OPT. ZOOM]/[GUIDE LINE]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 123 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

124

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• If there are any white saturated areas, we

recommend compensating the exposure towards

negative (P63) referring to the histogram (P56) and

then taking the picture again. It may result in a better

quality picture.

• There may be white saturated areas if the distance

between the camera and the subject is too close

when taking pictures with the flash.

If [HIGHLIGHT] is set to [ON] in this case, the area directly illuminated by the photo flash will

become white saturated and appear blinking in black and white.

• The LCD/EVF will display overexposed portions of the image as white blinking areas. These

only exist on the camera’s display, not on the actual photo.

• This does not work while in Multi Playback (P50), Calendar Playback (P51), or Playback Zoom

(P51).

• Refer to P75 for details.

[HISTOGRAM]

This allows you to set either to display or not display the

histogram. (P56)

[OFF]

[ON]: Position of the histogram can be set. Refer to P57 on

how to set.

[GUIDE LINE]

This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

(P56)

[OFF]/[ ]/[ ]

[]: Position of the guide line can be set. Refer to P56 for

how to set.

[HIGHLIGHT]

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back,

white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

[OFF]/[ON]

[AF/AE LOCK]

This will set what will be fixed by the [AF/AE LOCK] button when

taking a picture with fixed focus or exposure.

[AE]: Only the exposure is locked.

[AF]: Only the focus is locked.

[AF/AE]: Both focus and exposure are locked.

[ON] [OFF]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 124 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

125

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

About [ ] and [ ]

[ ] will adjust the focus automatically when the jitter of the camera gets small. [ ] will

adjust the focus at all times (continuous AF operation).

The camera will adjust the focus automatically, and the focus adjustment when the shutter

button is pressed becomes faster. It is effective when you do not want to miss the photo

opportunity.

Note

•

The battery will be consumed faster than usual.

• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.

• When [PRE AF] is set to [ ], it may take time to focus on the subject if you rotate the zoom

ring from Wide to Tele or suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one.

• [PRE AF] does not work during the Preview Mode.

• [PRE AF] does not work with lenses that do not allow Auto Focus and Four Thirds mount

specification lens not compatible to contrast AF. [ ] does not work with lenses for which the

Focus Mode cannot be set to [AFC]. (P16)

• Refer to P72 for details.

[AF/AE LOCK HOLD]

This will set the operation of [AF/AE LOCK] button when taking a

picture with fixed focus or exposure.

[OFF]: The focus and the exposure are fixed only while you

are pressing [AF/AE LOCK]. (P75)

If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is canceled.

[ON]: The focus and the exposure remain fixed even if you

release [AF/AE LOCK] after pressing it.

If you press [AF/AE LOCK] again, AF/AE Lock is

canceled.

[PRE AF]

Depending on the setting, camera will adjust the focus

automatically before pressing the shutter button halfway.

[OFF]

[ ]: Quick AF

[ ]: Continuous AF

[DIRECT AF AREA]

Position and size of the AF area can be modified easily during

recording.

[OFF]

[ON]: AF area can be moved freely with 3/4/2/1 when

[Ø] is selected.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 125 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

126

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• If you set [OFF], be careful as the picture may not be properly focused even if [AFS] or [AFC] in

Focus Mode is set.

• This does not operate during motion picture recording.

• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different depending on used lens.

–When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is attached and at

Wide: Approx. 1.0 m (3.28 feet) to 3.0 m (9.84 feet)

• The AF Assist Lamp is valid only for the subject in the center of the screen. Use it by

positioning the subject in the center of the screen.

• Remove the lens hood.

• When you do not want to use the AF Assist Lamp (e.g. when taking pictures of animals in dark

places), set the [AF ASSIST LAMP] to [OFF]. In this case, it will become more difficult to focus

on the subject.

• The AF Assist Lamp gets slightly blocked when the lens included in the DMC-G10K is used, but

it does not affect the performance.

• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus when a lens

with large diameter is used.

• The setting for the [AF ASSIST LAMP] is fixed to [OFF] in [SCENERY] Mode,

[NIGHT SCENERY] or [CREATIVE NIGHT SCENERY] in [NIGHT PORTRAIT] Mode, and

[SUNSET] in Scene Mode.

• Refer to P73 for details.

[FOCUS PRIORITY]

It will set so no picture can be taken when it is out of focus.

[OFF]: This gives priority to the best time to take a picture so

you can take a picture when the shutter button is

pressed fully.

[ON]: You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought

into focus.

[AF ASSIST LAMP]

Illuminating the subject makes it easier for the camera to focus

when recording in low light conditions that make focusing difficult.

[OFF]: The AF Assist Lamp does not turn on.

[ON]: When taking pictures in dark places, the AF Assist

Lamp lights while the shutter button is pressed

halfway. (Larger AF areas are now displayed.)

[AF+MF]

It is possible to adjust focus manually after it was adjusted automatically.

[OFF]

[ON]: It is possible to finely adjust the focus manually by

rotating the focus ring while AF lock (Focus Mode is

set to [AFS] and shutter button is half-way pressed, or

AF lock with [AF/AE LOCK]).

[MF ASSIST]

In Manual Focus, the assistance screen appears on the screen to

facilitate focusing on the subject.

[OFF]

[ON]: Center of the screen will be enlarged automatically

when the focus ring is rotated.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 126 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

127

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• Refer to P73 for details.

• Set to [ON] to display the [EXPO.METER] when correcting exposure,

performing program shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.

• Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.

• The Exposure Meter will only be displayed when the camera is set to

display information on the LCD monitor or viewfinder (P54)

• The [EXPO.METER] disappears after approximately

4 seconds if no operation is performed.

• Refer to P55 for details.

• Refer to P54 for details.

• Refer to P55 for details.

[MF GUIDE]

In Manual Focus, it is possible to check if the focus position is

near side or far side.

[OFF]

[ON]: MF guide is displayed on the screen when the focus

ring is rotated.

[PREVIEW HOLD]

This will set the operation of the [ ] button when displaying the

preview screen.

[OFF]: Preview screen is displayed only when the [ ] is

pressed.

It will return to previous screen when [ ] is released.

[ON]: Preview screen is displayed even after the [ ] is

released after pressing. (P87)

It will return to previous screen when [ ] is pressed

again.

[EXPO.METER]

Select whether or not to display the Exposure Meter when the mode dial is

switched to

³/±/´/² etc.

[OFF]/[ON]

[LVF DISP.STYLE]

This will set the display style of the viewfinder.

[]: Viewfinder style

[]: LCD monitor style

[LCD DISP.STYLE]

This will set the display style of the LCD monitor.

[]: Viewfinder style

[]: LCD monitor style

[PLAY ON LCD]

It will switch automatically to LCD monitor during the playback

when the viewfinder was selected during the recording.

[OFF]/[ON]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 127 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

128

Advanced (Recording pictures)

• It will display dial operation guide to the screen that is possible to

perform Exposure Compensation, Program Shift, aperture setting, or

shutter speed setting when set to [ON].

A Dial operation guide

• Imaging device and image processing is optimized when the camera is purchased. Use this

function when bright spots not in subject get recorded, and it is bothering you.

• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.

• Dust reduction function will operate automatically when the camera is turned on, but you can

use this function when you see dust. (P166)

• When using a Leica lens mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M, DMW-MA3R; optional), set it to [ON].

[¦

BUTTON SWITCH]

It is possible to set how the [¦] button to toggle to Intelligent

Auto Mode will operate.

[SINGLE PRESS]:

It will switch to Intelligent Auto Mode by pressing [¦].

[PRESS AND HOLD]:

It will switch to Intelligent Auto Mode by pressing [¦] for a while.

[DIAL GUIDE]

Sets if the operation switch guide when the mode dial is switched

to , , and is to be displayed or not.

[OFF]/[ON]

[MENU RESUME]

The last operated menu position is saved even if the camera is

turned off.

[OFF]/[ON]

[PIXEL REFRESH]

It will perform optimization of imaging device and image

processing.

[SENSOR CLEANING]

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to

the front of the imaging device is performed.

[SHOOT W/O LENS]

It is possible to setup so the shutter will not operate when there is

no lens on the unit.

[OFF]: You cannot press the shutter button when a lens is not

attached to the camera body or is not attached

correctly.

[ON]: Shutter will operate regardless of the lens on the unit.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 128 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

129

VQT2S62

Advanced (Recording pictures)

Entering Text

It is possible to enter babies’ and pets’ names and the names of travel destinations when

recording. (Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be entered.)

Display the entry screen and press 4 to move to the character

selection section.

• You can display the entry screen via the following operations.

–[NAME] of [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] (P94) in Scene Mode.

–[NAME] in [FACE RECOG.] (P107)

–[LOCATION] in [TRAVEL DATE] (P110)

–[TITLE EDIT] (P135)

Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then press

[MENU/SET] to register.

• Press [DISPLAY] to switch text between [A] (capitals), [a]

(lower case) and [&/1] (special characters and numbers).

• The entry position cursor can be moved left and right with the

rear dial.

• To enter a blank, move the cursor to [SPACE], to delete an entered character, move the

cursor to [DELETE], or to stop editing during text entry, move the cursor to [CANCEL],

and press [MENU/SET].

• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. (Maximum of 9 characters when setting

names in [FACE RECOG.])

Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [SET] and then press

[MENU/SET] to end text input.

• Display will return to the appropriate setting screen.

Note

•

Text can be scrolled if all of the entered text does not fit on the screen.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 129 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

130

Advanced (Playback)

Playing Back Motion Pictures/Pictures with Audio

• The file format that can be played back with this camera is QuickTime Motion JPEG.

Press [(].

Press 2/1 to select a picture with a motion picture

icon ([ ]), and then press 3 to play back.

A The motion picture recording time

B Motion picture icon

• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on the

upper right of the screen.

For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as [8m30s].

∫ Operations performed during motion picture playback

The cursor displayed during playback is the same as 3/4/2/1.

A Play/Pause

B Stop

C Fast rewind, Frame-by-frame rewind

D Fast forward, Frame-by-frame forward

¢ These operations can be performed only in the Pause Mode.

E Reduce volume level

F Increase volume level

• About fast forward/rewind playback

– Press 1 during playback to fast forward (press 2 to rewind). The fast forward/rewind speed

increases if you press 2/1 again. (The display on the screen changes from

5 to .)

– Press 3 to resume Normal Playback speed.

– When using a high capacity card, it is possible that fast rewinding may be slower than usual.

Note

•

Please note that the bundled software includes QuickTime to play back motion picture files

created with the camera on the PC.

• QuickTime Motion JPEG motion pictures that were recorded with a PC or other equipment may

have lower image quality or may not be able to play back with this unit.

Motion pictures

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 130 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

131

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

Note

•

Sound can be heard through the speaker. Refer to [VOLUME] (P31) for information about how

to adjust the volume in the [SETUP] menu.

• Pictures with audio recorded with other equipment may not play back on this unit.

Using the [PLAYBACK] Mode Menu

You can use various functions in Playback Mode to rotate pictures, set protection for them

etc.

•

With [TEXT STAMP], [RESIZE], [CROPPING] or [ASPECT CONV.], a new edited picture is

created. A new picture cannot be created if there is no free space on the card so we

recommend checking that there is free space and then editing the picture.

You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronisation with music, and you can

do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion

pictures, only pictures of a particular category, or only favorites.

We recommend this feature when you view your pictures by connecting the camera to a

TV.

Select [SLIDE SHOW] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 3/4 to select the item and then press

[MENU/SET].

• [FAVORITE] can be selected only when [FAVORITE] on the

[PLAYBACK] menu (P134) is at [ON] and there are pictures

already set as favorites.

• During [CATEGORY SELECTION], press 3/4/2/1 to select

a category, and then press [MENU/SET] to proceed to step

For details on categories, refer to P133.

Pictures with audio

Press 2/1 to select a picture with the audio icon [ ]

and then press 3 to play back.

A Audio icon

• Refer to [AUDIO REC.] (P122) for information about how to create still

pictures with audio.

[SLIDE SHOW]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 131 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

132

Advanced (Playback)

∫ Operations performed during slide show

The cursor displayed during playback is the same as 3/4/2/1.

•

The menu screen is restored when [‚] is pressed.

∫ Changing the slide show settings

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting

[EFFECT] or [SETUP] on the slide show menu screen.

[EFFECT]

This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from

one picture to the next.

[NATURAL], [SWING], [URBAN], [OFF]

•

When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen

effect.

• [EFFECT] is set to [OFF] when playing a slide show with motion pictures only.

• Some [EFFECT] will not operate when playing back pictures displayed vertically.

[SETUP]

[DURATION] or [REPEAT] can be set.

•

[DURATION] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected as the [EFFECT] setting.

Note

•

It is not possible to add new music.

Press 3 to select [START] and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press 4 to finish the slide show.

• Normal Playback resumes after the slide show finishes.

A Play/Pause

B Stop

C Back to previous picture

D Ahead to next picture

¢ These operations can be performed only in the Pause Mode or

during motion picture playback.

E Reduce volume level

F Increase volume level

Item Settings

[DURATION] 1SEC./2SEC./3SEC./5SEC.

[REPEAT] OFF/ON

[SOUND]

[OFF]: There will be no sound.

[AUTO]:

Music is played when the still pictures are played

back, and audio is played when the motion pictures

or still pictures with audio are played back.

[MUSIC]: Music is played back.

[AUDIO]:

Audio (only for motion pictures and still pictures with

audio) is played back.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 132 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

133

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

Playback in [NORMAL PLAY], [PICTURE PLAY], [VIDEO PLAY], [CATEGORY PLAY] or

[FAVORITE PLAY] can be selected.

Select [PLAYBACK MODE] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 3/4 to select the item and then press

[MENU/SET].

• [FAVORITE PLAY] can be selected only when [FAVORITE] on

the [PLAYBACK] menu (P134) is at [ON] and there are pictures

already set as favorites.

• Refer to P49 for information about how to play back pictures in

[NORMAL PLAY], [PICTURE PLAY], [VIDEO PLAY] or [FAVORITE PLAY] can be

selected.

When [CATEGORY PLAY] is selected in step 2

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the category and then

press [MENU/SET] to set.

• If a picture is found in a category, the category icon turns blue.

• It may take time to search the picture files if there are a lot on

the card.

• If you press [‚] while searching, the searching will stop

halfway.

• Pictures are sorted into the categories shown below.

¢Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to playback and then press [MENU/SET].

Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognize faces correctly even for

registered faces, depending on the facial expression and environment.

Also, if there are multiple faces that are already registered in the picture, it will be

categorized only once to the person found first in the registration.

[PLAYBACK MODE]

[CATEGORY]

Recording information

e.g. Scene Modes

[CATEGORY]

Recording information

e.g. Scene Modes

[FACE RECOG.]

[BABY1]/[BABY2],

[i-BABY]

[PORTRAIT],

[i-PORTRAIT],

[NIGHT PORTRAIT],

[i-NIGHT PORTRAIT],

[BABY1]/[BABY2],

[i-BABY]

[PET]

[SCENERY],

[i-SCENERY], [SUNSET],

[i-SUNSET]

[FOOD]

[NIGHT PORTRAIT],

[i-NIGHT PORTRAIT],

[i-NIGHT SCENERY]

[TRAVEL DATE]

[SPORTS], [PARTY]

[MOTION PICTURE]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 133 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

134

Advanced (Playback)

You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as

favorites.

•

Play back the pictures set as favorites only as a slide show.

• Play back only the pictures set as favorites. ([FAVORITE PLAY])

• Delete all the pictures not set as favorites. ([ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ])

Select [FAVORITE] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

∫ Canceling all the [FAVORITE] settings

1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

•

You cannot select [CANCEL] if not even one picture has been set as a favorite.

• [CANCEL] cannot be selected when in [PLAYBACK MODE].

Note

•

You can set up to 999 pictures as favorites.

• When printing pictures at a photo printing store, [ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] (P53) is useful so

only the pictures you want to be printed remain on the card.

• You may not be able to set pictures taken with other equipment as favorites.

• The pictures that were taken with the [QUALITY] set to [ ] cannot be set to [FAVORITE].

Ü [FAVORITE]

Press 4 to select [ON] and then press

[MENU/SET].

• You cannot set pictures as favorites if [FAVORITE] is set to

[OFF]. Also [Ü] will not appear when [FAVORITE] is set to [OFF]

even if it was previously set to [ON].

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press 4

to set it during playback.

• Repeat the above procedure.

• If 4 is pressed again, the favorite setting is canceled.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 134 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

135

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be included

in prints using [TEXT STAMP] (P136). (Only alphabetic characters and symbols can be

entered.)

Select [TITLE EDIT] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then

press [MENU/SET].

Enter the text. (P129)

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is selected.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

Note

•

To delete the title, erase all the text in the text input screen.

• Text can be scrolled if all of the registered text does not fit on the screen.

• You can print out texts (comments) using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” bundled software on the

CD-ROM (supplied).

• You can set up to 50 pictures at one time with [MULTI].

• You cannot use title edit for the following pictures.

– Motion pictures

– Protected pictures

– Pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ]

– Pictures recorded with other equipment

[TITLE EDIT]

Select the picture, and then

press [MENU/SET] to set.

• [’] is displayed for pictures with titles

already registered.

[MULTI] setting

Press [DISPLAY] to set (repeat), and

then press [MENU/SET] to set.

[SINGLE] [MULTI]

Press 2/1 to select

the picture.

Press 3/4/2/1 to

select the pictures.

•

The setting is canceled when [DISPLAY] is pressed again.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 135 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

136

Advanced (Playback)

You can stamp the recording date/time, name, location, travel date or title onto the

recorded pictures.

It is suitable for regular size printing. (Pictures with a picture size larger than [S] will be

resized when stamping the date etc. on them.)

Select [TEXT STAMP] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then

press [MENU/SET].

Press 3/4 to select text stamp items, and then press 1.

[TEXT STAMP]

Select the picture, and then

press [MENU/SET] to set.

• [‘] appears on screen if the picture is

stamped with text.

[MULTI] setting

Press [DISPLAY] to set (repeat), and

then press [MENU/SET] to set.

•

The setting is canceled when

[DISPLAY] is pressed again.

[SINGLE] [MULTI]

Press 2/1 to select

the picture.

Press 3/4/2/1 to

select the pictures.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 136 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

137

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

Press 3/4 to select the settings, and then press [MENU/SET].

Press [MENU/SET].

• If you set [TEXT STAMP] for a picture with a picture size larger than [S], the picture size

will become smaller as shown below.

• When selecting [ ] or [ ], press 3 to select [YES] for stamping [AGE], and then

press [MENU/SET] and proceed to step

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press

[MENU/SET].

• The message [SAVE NEW PICTURES?] appears if the picture

was recorded with a picture size [S].

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is selected.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

Item Setting item

[SHOOTING DATE]

[OFF]

[W/OTIME]: Stamp the year, month and date.

[WITHTIME]: Stamp the year, month, day, hour and

minutes.

[NAME]

[OFF]

[]: Name registered in Face Recognition will be

stamped.

[]: Stamps names on pictures that already have

been registered name settings of [BABY1]/

[BABY2] or [PET] in Scene Mode.

[LOCATION]

[OFF]

[ON]:

Stamps the travel destination name set under

[LOCATION].

[TRAVEL DATE]

[OFF]

[ON]:

Stamps the travel date set under

[TRAVEL DATE].

[TITLE]

[OFF]

[ON]:

Title input in the [TITLE EDIT] will be stamped.

Aspect ratio setting Picture size

/ >

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 137 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

138

Advanced (Playback)

Note

•

When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you

specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer.

• You can set up to 50 pictures at one time in [MULTI].

• The picture quality may deteriorate when text stamping is carried out.

• Depending on the printer being used, some characters may be cut at printing. Check before

printing.

• Text and dates cannot be stamped on the pictures in the following cases.

– Motion pictures

– Pictures with audio

– Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title

– Pictures that were previously stamped with [TEXT STAMP]

– Pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ]

– Pictures recorded with other equipment

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 138 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

139

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of

pixels) is reduced.

Select [RESIZE] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is

selected.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

Note

•

You can set up to 50 pictures at one time in [MULTI].

• The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate.

• It may not be possible to resize pictures recorded with other equipment.

• Motion pictures, pictures with audio, pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken

with [ ], [ ] or [ ] cannot be resized.

Q [RESIZE] Reducing the picture size (number of pixels)

Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then

press [MENU/SET].

Select the picture and size.

[SINGLE] setting

1 Press 2/1 to select the picture, and

then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 2/1 to select the size

, and

then press [MENU/SET].

¢ Only the sizes to which the pictures can be

resized is displayed.

[SINGLE]

[MULTI] setting

1 Press 3/4 to select the size, and then

press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture,

and then press [DISPLAY].

•

Repeat this step for each picture, and

press [MENU/SET] to set.

[MULTI]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 139 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

140

Advanced (Playback)

You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

Select [CROPPING] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press [MENU/SET].

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

Note

•

Depending on the cut size, the picture size of the cropped picture may become smaller than

that of the original picture.

• The picture quality of the cropped picture will deteriorate.

• It may not be possible to crop pictures recorded with other equipment.

• Motion pictures, pictures with audio, pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken

with [ ], [ ] or [ ] cannot be cropped.

• Information regarding the Face Recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images

having undergone [CROPPING].

[CROPPING]

Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press

[MENU/SET].

Use the rear dial and press

3/4/2/1 to select the parts

to be cropped.

Rear dial (right):

Enlargement

Rear dial (left): Reduction

3/4/2/1: Move

Reduction Enlargement

()

Move the position

()

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 140 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

141

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

You can convert pictures taken with a [W] aspect ratio to a [Y], a [X] or a [ ] aspect

ratio.

Select [ASPECT CONV.] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

Note

•

After converting the aspect ratio, the picture size may become larger than that of the original

picture.

• You may not be able to convert pictures taken on other equipment.

• The [ASPECT CONV.] cannot be performed on the motion pictures, pictures with audio,

pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ].

• Information regarding the face recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images

having undergone [ASPECT CONV.].

? [ASPECT CONV.]

Press 3/4 to select [Y], [X] or [ ] and then

press [MENU/SET].

Press 2/1 to select a picture taken with [W]

aspect ratio, and then press [MENU/SET].

Press 2/1 to determine the horizontal position,

and press [MENU/SET] to set.

• Use 3/4 to set the frame position for pictures rotated vertically.

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press

[MENU/SET].

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 141 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

142

Advanced (Playback)

This mode allows you to automatically display pictures vertically if they were recorded

holding the camera vertically or rotate pictures manually in 90o steps.

Select [ROTATE] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

• The [ROTATE] function is disabled when [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [OFF].

Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press

[MENU/SET].

• Motion pictures and protected pictures cannot be rotated.

Press 3/4 to select the direction to rotate the

picture and then press [MENU/SET].

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

Select [ROTATE DISP.] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Note

•

[ROTATE DISP.] can only be used with the lens (P15) compatible with the Direction Detection

Function (P36).

• When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless

the OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows

recording information etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and

Information Technology Industries Association)”.

• It may not be possible to rotate pictures that have been recorded with other equipment.

• The display is not rotated during Multi Playback (P50).

• Pictures recorded with the camera upside down will not be displayed rotated.

N [ROTATE]/M [ROTATE DISP.]

Rotate (The picture is rotated manually)

: The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90o.

: The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90o.

Rotate display (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed)

Press 4 to select [ON] and then press

[MENU/SET].

• The pictures are displayed without being rotated when you

select [OFF].

• Refer to P49 for information about how to play back pictures.

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 142 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

143

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures

to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording

date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store.

For details, ask at your photo printing store.

For more information visit:

http://panasonic.jp/dc/dpof_110/white_e.htm

Select [PRINT SET] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 3/4 to set the number of prints, and then press [MENU/SET]

to set.

• When [MULTI] has been selected, repeat steps 3 and 4 for each picture. (It is not

possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

∫ Canceling all the [PRINT SET] settings

1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

•

You cannot select [CANCEL] if not even one picture has been set for printing.

∫ To print the date

After setting the number of prints, set/cancel printing with the recording date by pressing

[DISPLAY].

•

When you go to a photo printing store for digital printing, be sure to order the printing of the

date additionally if required.

• Depending on the photo printing store or the printer, the date may not be printed even if you set

to print the date. For further information, ask at your photo printing store or refer to the

operating instructions for the printer.

• The date cannot be printed on pictures stamped with text.

[PRINT SET]

Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then

press [MENU/SET].

Select the picture, and then

press [MENU/SET].

[SINGLE] [MULTI]

Press 2/1 to select

the picture.

Press 3/4/2/1 to

select the pictures.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 143 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

144

Advanced (Playback)

Note

•

The number of prints can be set from 0 to 999.

• With a printer supporting PictBridge, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence

so check if this is the case.

• It may not be possible to use the print settings with other equipment. In this case, cancel all the

settings, and reset the settings.

• If the file is not based on the DCF standard, the print setting cannot be set.

• [PRINT SET] cannot be set for pictures that were taken with the [QUALITY] set to [ ].

You can set protection for pictures you do not want to be deleted by mistake.

Select [PROTECT] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

∫ Canceling all the [PROTECT] settings

1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

•

If you press [MENU/SET] while canceling protection, the canceling will stop halfway.

Note

•

The protect setting may not be effective on other equipment.

• Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted.

• Even if you do not protect pictures on a card, they cannot be deleted when the card’s

Write-Protect switch is set to [LOCK].

P [PROTECT]

Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then

press [MENU/SET].

Select the picture, and then

press [MENU/SET].

When [MULTI] has been selected

•

Repeat these steps for each picture.

• The settings are canceled when

[MENU/SET] is pressed again.

[SINGLE] [MULTI]

Press 2/1 to select

the picture.

Press 3/4/2/1 to

select the pictures.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 144 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

145

VQT2S62

Advanced (Playback)

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

Select [FACE REC EDIT] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28)

Note

•

Cleared information regarding the [FACE RECOG.] cannot be restored.

• When all Face Recognition information in a picture has been canceled, the picture will not be

categorised using Face Recognition in [CATEGORY PLAY].

• You cannot edit the Face Recognition information of protected pictures.

[FACE REC EDIT]

Press 3/4 to select [REPLACE] or [DELETE] and

then press [MENU/SET].

Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press

[MENU/SET].

• You cannot select pictures for which Face Recognition

information has not been registered.

Press 2/1 to select the person and then press

[MENU/SET].

• [DELETE] > step 6.

• You cannot select a person who has not been registered.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to replace

and then press [MENU/SET].

Press 3 to select [YES] and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.

• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 145 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

146

Connecting to other equipment

Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen

1 Yellow: to the video input socket

2 White: to the audio input socket

A Align the marks, and insert.

B AV cable (supplied)

• Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out.

(Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which may cause malfunction.)

Connect the AV cable B (supplied) to the video input and the audio

input sockets on the TV.

Connect the AV cable to the [AV OUT] socket on the camera.

Turn the TV on and select external input.

Turn the camera on and then press [(].

Note

•

Depending on the [ASPECT RATIO], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or

the left and right of the pictures.

• Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.

• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

• When you play back a picture vertically, it may be blurry.

• You can view pictures on TVs in other countries (regions) which use the NTSC or PAL system

when you set [VIDEO OUT] in the [SETUP] menu.

• Audio will be played back in monaural.

• The viewfinder cannot be displayed when connected with a AV cable.

Playing back pictures using the AV cable (supplied)

Preparations: Set the [TV ASPECT]. (P33)

Turn this unit and the TV off.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 146 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

147

VQT2S62

Connecting to other equipment

The recorded still pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot.

Note

•

Depending on the TV model, pictures may not be displayed on the full screen.

• Motion pictures cannot be played back. To play back motion pictures, connect the camera to

the TV with the AV cable (supplied).

• SDHC Memory Cards cannot be played back unless it is a TV compatible with SDHC Memory

Cards or SDXC Memory Cards.

• SDXC Memory Cards cannot be played back unless it is a TV compatible with SDXC Memory

Cards.

You can enjoy high quality pictures and motion pictures on the TV by connecting the

camera with the HDMI compatible high-definition TV using HDMI mini cable (optional).

Playing back pictures on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot

Playing back on the TV with HDMI socket

What is HDMI?

HDMI is the interface for digital devices. When this unit is connected to a HDMI

compatible device, the image and audio can be output with a digital signal. If you

connect this unit to a HDMI compatible high-definition TV and then play back the

recorded high-definition images, you can enjoy them in high resolution with high quality

sound.

If you connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link, linked

operations (VIERA Link) are possible. (P149)

Preparations: Check the [HDMI MODE]. (P34)

Turn this unit and the TV off.

1 HDMI socket

2 TV with HDMI socket

3 HDMI mini (C type)

A Align the marks, and insert.

B HDMI mini cable (optional)

•

Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug. (It may result

in malfunction if it is plugged in obliquely or in the wrong direction.)

Connect the HDMI mini cable B (optional) to the HDMI input socket

on the TV.

HDMI IN

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 147 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

148

Connecting to other equipment

Note

•

Depending on the [ASPECT RATIO], bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the left

and right of the pictures.

• Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15,

RP-CDHM30; optional).

Part numbers: RP-CDHM15 (1.5 m) (5 feet), RP-CDHM30 (3.0 m) (10 feet)

• Output from the HDMI mini cable has priority when both AV cable and HDMI mini cable are

connected.

• HDMI output is not possible even if you connect the HDMI mini cable while the unit is

connected to the PC or the printer.

• HDMI connection is disabled and the connection with the USB connection cable will take

priority when you connect the USB connection cable while it is outputting via the HDMI mini

cable.

• During HDMI output, no picture is displayed on the LCD monitor or viewfinder.

• When pictures are displayed, they may not be displayed properly depending on the type of TV.

• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

• Audio will be played back in monaural.

Connect the HDMI mini cable to the [HDMI] socket on the camera.

Turn the TV on and switch to HDMI input.

Turn the camera on and then press [(].

• When [VIERA Link] (P34) is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to a TV supporting

VIERA Link, input of the TV will be switched automatically and playback screen will be

displayed (P149).

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 148 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

149

VQT2S62

Connecting to other equipment

Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with

a HDMI mini cable (optional) (P147).

Turn the camera on and then press [(].

Operate with the remote control for the TV.

Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link

¢ The shape of the remote control varies depending on the region. Operate following the TV

guide displayed on screen.

Playback using VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)

What is the VIERA Link?

•

VIERA Link™ is a new name for EZ Sync™.

• This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy

operations when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using a

HDMI mini cable (optional) for automatic linked operations. (Not all operations are possible.)

• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on a HDMI control function using the

standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification. Linked operations with

HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not guaranteed. When using

devices made by other companies that are compatible with VIERA Link, refer to the

operating instructions for the respective devices.

• This unit is compatible with VIERA Link Ver.5. VIERA Link Ver.5 is the newest Panasonic

version and is also compatible with existing Panasonic VIERA Link devices. (As of

December 2009)

Preparations: Set the [VIERA Link] to [ON]. (P34)

1 [SUB MENU]

2 [OK]

3 [RETURN]

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 149 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

150

Connecting to other equipment

∫ Usable functions

Operate with the remote control for the TV.

Note

•

Operation icons are hidden by pressing [RETURN], or if no operation is performed for a while

when the operation icons are displayed. Operation icons are displayed when one of the

following buttons are pressed while the operation icons are not displayed.

–3/4/2/1, [OK], [SUB MENU], [RETURN], Red button, Green button, Yellow button

• It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2

or more HDMI input terminals on the TV.

• When the [VIERA Link] (P34) of this unit is set to [ON], operation using the button on this unit

will be limited.

• VIERA Link must be activated on the connected TV. (Read the operating instructions of the TV

for how to set etc.)

• If you are not using VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] (P34) to [OFF].

Multi Playback

This is displayed initially when using the VIERA Link.

3/4/2/1: Select the image.

[OK]: Go to one screen display.

Red button: Switch the types of data to play back.

[SUB MENU]:

Display the Playback Mode selection screen.

•

The type of data for playback changes in the order of [ALL] >

[] > [] > [ALL].

• Either the [NORMAL PLAY], [SLIDE SHOW], [CATEGORY

PLAY], [FAVORITE PLAY] or the [CALENDAR] can be selected

in the Playback Mode selection screen when [ALL] is selected.

One screen display

Select the image while in Multi Playback, and then press [OK].

2/1: Go to previous/next image.

3: Display the recording information.

4: Return to Multi Playback.

[OK]: Playback the motion picture (when motion

picture is selected).

Playback the audio (when picture with audio

is selected).

Red button: Start the Slide Show.

[SUB MENU]:

Go to Slide Show setting screen.

•

During Motion Picture Playback, use 2/1 for back/forward and

4 to stop playback.

Slide show

Press Red button during one screen display.

2/1:

Go to previous/next image (when Slide Show

is paused/when motion picture is played back).

4: Finish the Slide Show and return to one

screen display.

[OK]: Pause.

[SUB MENU]:

Go to Slide Show setting screen.

•

To playback the audio of the motion pictures, set the [SOUND] in

the Slide Show setting screen to [AUTO] or [AUDIO].

A Operation icon

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 150 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

151

VQT2S62

Connecting to other equipment

∫ Other linked operations

Turning the power off:

If you use the remote control for the TV to turn off the power, the power on this unit also

turns off. (When connecting the unit to a PC with a USB cable, the power will not turn off.)

Automatic input switching:

•

If you connect with a HDMI mini cable and then turn on the power on this unit, and then press

[(], the input channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power

is in standby status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power

on link] setting).

• Depending on the HDMI terminal on the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In

this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch the input channel. (For details on how to

switch input, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

• If VIERA Link does not work properly, refer to page 178.

Note

•

If you are unsure whether or not the TV you are using are compatible with VIERA Link, read the

operating instructions for the TV.

• Available linked operations between this unit and a Panasonic TV is different depending on the

types of Panasonic TVs even if they are compatible with VIERA Link. Refer to the operating

instructions of the TV for the operations that support on the TV.

• Operation is not possible with a cable that is not based on the HDMI standard.

Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15,

RP-CDHM30; optional).

Part numbers: RP-CDHM15 (1.5 m) (5 feet), RP-CDHM30 (3.0 m) (10 feet)

• VIERA Link will not work even if you connect the HDMI mini cable while the unit is connected to

the PC or the printer.

• [HDMI MODE] (P34) for this unit is determined automatically when the VIERA Link is operating.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 151 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

152

Connecting to other equipment

Connecting to a PC

You can acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC.

•

Some PCs can read directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to the

operating instructions of your PC.

• If the computer being used does not support SDXC Memory Cards, a message

prompting you to format may appear. (Doing so will cause recorded images to be erased

so do not choose to format.)

If the card is not recognized, please refer to the below support site.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

• You can easily print out or mail the pictures you have imported. Use of the

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied) is a convenient way of

doing this.

• Read the separate operating instructions for the supplied software for more information about

the software in the CD-ROM (supplied) and how to install it.

Connect the camera to a PC via the USB connection cable A

(supplied).

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Use of

cables other than the supplied USB connection cable may cause malfunction.

Press 3/4 to select [PC], and then press

[MENU/SET].

Preparations: Turn on the camera and the PC.

A USB connection cable (supplied)

• Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out.

(Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which may cause malfunction.)

B Align the marks, and insert.

C DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional)

• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P161). If the remaining battery

power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating, the status indicator

blinks and the alarm beeps.

Refer to

“Disconnecting the USB connection cable safely” (P153) before disconnecting the

USB connection cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.

USB MODE

SELECT

SET

PLEASE SELECT

THE USB MODE

PictBridge(PTP)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 152 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

153

VQT2S62

Connecting to other equipment

• If [USB MODE] (P33) is set to [PC] in the [SETUP] menu in advance, the camera will be

automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB MODE] selection

screen. Since there is no need to set this each time you connect to the PC, it is

convenient.

• When the camera has been connected to the PC with [USB MODE] set to

[PictBridge(PTP)], a message may appear on the PC’s screen. Select [Cancel] to close

the screen, and disconnect the camera from the PC. Then set [USB MODE] to [PC]

again.

Double-click on [Removable Disk] in [My Computer].

• When using a Macintosh, the drive is displayed on the desktop. (“LUMIX”, “NO_NAME”

or “Untitled” is displayed.)

Double-click [DCIM] folder.

Using a drag-and-drop operation, move the pictures you want to

acquire or the folder storing those pictures to any different folder on

the PC.

∫ Disconnecting the USB connection cable safely

•

Proceed with the hardware removal using “Safely Remove Hardware” on the task tray of the

PC. If the icon is not displayed, check that [ACCESS] is not displayed on the LCD monitor of

the digital camera before removing the hardware.

Note

•

Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (P161).

• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection

cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.

∫ Viewing the contents of the card using the PC (folder composition)

Folders and images processed in the PC cannot be played back on the camera. It is

recommended to use the “

PHOTOfunSTUDIO” bundled software on the CD-ROM

(supplied) when you write the image from PC to a card.

A new folder is created when pictures are taken in the following situations.

•

After [NO.RESET] (P35) in the [SETUP] menu has been executed

• When a card containing a folder with the same folder number has been inserted (Such as when

pictures were taken using another make of camera)

• When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder

1 Folder number

2 Color space P: sRGB

_: AdobeRGB

3 File number

4 JPG: Pictures

MOV: Motion pictures

RW2: Pictures in RAW files

MISC: DPOF print

Favorite

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 153 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

154

Connecting to other equipment

∫ Connection in the PTP Mode (Windows

XP, Windows Vista

, Windows

7 and

Mac OS X only)

Set [USB MODE] to [PictBridge(PTP)].

Data can now be read only from the card into the PC.

•

When there are 1000 or more pictures on a card, the pictures may not be imported in the PTP

mode.

Printing the Pictures

If you connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge, you can select the pictures to

be printed out and instruct that printing be started on the camera’s LCD monitor.

•

Some printers can print directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to

the operating instructions of your printer.

Connect the camera to a printer via the USB connection cable A

(supplied).

• When the camera is connected to the printer, the cable disconnect prohibit icon [å]

appears. Do not disconnect the USB cable while [å] is displayed.

Press 3/4 to select [PictBridge(PTP)], and then

press [MENU/SET].

Preparations: Turn on the camera and the printer.

Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the

pictures.

A USB connection cable (supplied)

• Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out.

(Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which may cause malfunction.)

B Align the marks, and insert.

C DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional)

• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P161). If the remaining battery

power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected, the status indicator blinks

and the alarm beeps. If this happens during printing, stop printing at once. If not printing,

disconnect the USB connection cable.

USB MODE

SELECT

SET

PLEASE SELECT

THE USB MODE

PictBridge(PTP)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 154 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

155

VQT2S62

Connecting to other equipment

Note

•

Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Use of cables other than

the supplied USB connection cable may cause malfunction.

• Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (P161).

• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off, and disconnect the USB connection

cable.

¢ Only when [FAVORITE] is at [ON] and when there are pictures set as favorites. (P134)

Selecting a single picture and printing it

Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press

[MENU/SET].

• The message disappears in about 2 seconds.

Press 3 to select [PRINT START] and then press

[MENU/SET].

• Refer to P156 for the items which can be set before starting to

print the pictures.

• Press [MENU/SET] to cancel printing halfway.

• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.

Selecting multiple pictures and printing them

Press 3.

Press 3/4 to select an item and then press

[MENU/SET].

• If the print check screen has appeared, select [YES], and print

the pictures.

Item Description of settings

[MULTI SELECT]

Multiple pictures are printed at one time.

• Press 3/4/2/1 to select the pictures, and then When [DISPLAY] is

pressed, [

é] appears on the pictures to be printed. (When [DISPLAY] is

pressed again, the setting is canceled.)

• After the pictures have been selected, press [MENU/SET].

[SELECT ALL] Prints all the stored pictures.

[PRINT SET

(DPOF)]

Prints the pictures set in [PRINT SET] only. (P143)

[FAVORITE]

Prints the pictures set as favorites only. (P134)

PictBridge

MULTI PRINT

100

0001100

100

0001

100

0001

PLEASE SELECT

THE PICTURE TO PRINT

SELECT

OFF

CANCEL

SELECT

SET

PRINT START

PRINT WITH DATE

NUM. OF PRINTS

PAPER SIZE

PAGE LAYOUT

SINGLE SELECT

CANCEL

SELECT

SET

MULTI SELECT

SELECT ALL

PRINT SET (DPOF)

FAVORITE

PictBridge

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 155 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

156

Connecting to other equipment

Select and set the items both on the screen in step 2 of the

“Selecting a single picture and printing it” and in step

3 of the

“Selecting multiple pictures and printing them” procedures.

•

When you want to print pictures on a paper size or a layout which is

not supported by the camera, set [PAPER SIZE] or [PAGE LAYOUT]

to [{] and then set the paper size or the layout on the printer. (For

details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.)

• When [PRINT SET (DPOF)] has been selected, the [PRINT WITH DATE] and

[NUM. OF PRINTS] items are not displayed.

• If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.

• Since the printer’s settings may take precedence over the print with date setting, check the

printer’s print with date setting as well.

• When printing images with a text stamp, please remember to set print with date to [OFF] or the

date will print on top.

• In some printers, the picture date for pictures taken with the aspect ratio set to [ ] will be

printed vertically.

Note

When asking the photo shop to print the pictures

• By stamping the date using [TEXT STAMP] (P136) or setting date printing at the time of the

[PRINT SET] (P143) setting before going to a photo shop, the dates can be printed at the photo

shop.

You can set the number of prints up to 999.

•

You can also use the rear dial to set.

Press 3 to select [PRINT START] and then press

[MENU/SET].

• Refer to P156 for the items which can be set before starting to

print the pictures.

• Press [MENU/SET] to cancel printing.

• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.

Print Settings

[PRINT WITH DATE]

Item Description of settings

[OFF] Date is not printed.

[ON] Date is printed.

[NUM. OF PRINTS]

OFF

CANCEL

SELECT

SET

PRINT START

PRINT WITH DATE

NUM. OF PRINTS

PAPER SIZE

PAGE LAYOUT

MULTI SELECT

OFF

CANCEL

SELECT

PRINT START

PRINT WITH DATE

NUM. OF PRINTS

PAPER SIZE

PAGE LAYOUT

MULTI SELECT

EXIT

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 156 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

157

VQT2S62

Connecting to other equipment

• Paper sizes not supported by the printer will not be displayed.

• An item cannot be selected if the printer does not support the page layout.

∫ Layout printing

When printing a picture several times on 1 sheet of paper

For example, if you want to print the same picture 4 times on 1 sheet of paper, set

[PAGE LAYOUT] to [ä] and then set [NUM. OF PRINTS] to 4 for the picture that you

want to print.

When printing different pictures on 1 sheet of paper

For example, if you want to print 4 different pictures on 1 sheet of paper, set

[PAGE LAYOUT] to [ä] and then set [NUM. OF PRINTS] to 1 for each of the 4 pictures.

Note

•

The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the [

] indication lights orange

during printing. After finishing printing, make sure there are no problems with the printer.

• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed several times. In this case, the

remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set.

•

When the pictures in RAW files are to be printed, the JPEG pictures recorded simultaneously by

the camera will be printed. If JPEG pictures do not exist, RAW file pictures cannot be printed.

[PAPER SIZE]

Item Description of settings

{ Settings on the printer are prioritized.

[L/3.5qk5q]

89 mm

127 mm

[2L/5qk7q] 127 mmk178 mm

[POSTCARD] 100 mmk148 mm

[16:9] 101.6 mmk180.6 mm

[A4] 210 mmk297 mm

[A3] 297 mmk420 mm

[10k15cm] 100 mmk150 mm

[4qk6q] 101.6 mmk152.4 mm

[8qk10q] 203.2 mmk254 mm

[LETTER] 216 mmk279.4 mm

[CARD SIZE] 54 mmk85.6 mm

[PAGE LAYOUT] (Layouts for printing that can be set with this unit)

Item Description of settings

{ Settings on the printer are prioritized.

á 1 picture with no frame on 1 page

â 1 picture with a frame on 1 page

ã 2pictures on 1page

ä 4pictures on 1page

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 157 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

158

Others

Using an External Flash (optional)

After attaching the external flash, the effective range will be increased when compared to

the camera’s built in flash.

Preparations:

•

Turn off the camera and close the built-in flash.

∫ Using the dedicated flash (DMW-FL220; optional)

Attach the dedicated flash to the hot shoe A

and then turn on the camera and the dedicated

flash.

• Be sure to firmly secure to the dedicated flash with the lock

ring B.

Select [FLASH] on the [REC] Mode menu. (P28)

Press 3/4 to select the mode and then press

[MENU/SET].

• While the external flash is connected, the following icons are

displayed.

Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

∫ When using other commercially available external flashes without

communication functions with the camera (DMC-G10)

•

It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash. If you want to use the external flash in

Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO

sensitivity to match the settings on the camera.

• Set to Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode on the camera and then set the

same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The exposure cannot be

compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter-Priority AE Mode

and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Program AE Mode because the

aperture value cannot be fixed.)

Note

•

You can set the aperture value, the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even

when attaching the external flash.

•

Some commercial external flashes have synchro terminals with high-voltage or reversed polarity.

Using such extra flashes may cause a malfunction or the camera may not operate normally.

• If you use commercially available external flashes with communication functions other than the

dedicated one, they may not operate normally or they may be damaged. Do not use them.

• Even if the external flash is turned off, the camera may enter the external flash mode when the

external flash is attached. When you are not using the external flash, detach it.

: External flash Forced ON

: External flash Slow Sync.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 158 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

159

VQT2S62

Others

• When attaching the external flash, the built-in flash cannot be activated.

• Do not open the built-in flash when an external flash is attached.

• The camera will become unstable when attaching the external flash, it is recommended to use

a tripod when taking picture.

• Turn off the camera when removing the external flash.

• Detach the external flash when carrying the camera.

• When attaching the external flash, do not hold only the external flash because it may detach

from the camera.

• If you use the external flash when the White Balance is set to [ ] finely adjust the White

Balance depending on the picture quality. (P78)

• If you take pictures close to the subject in Wide, the vignetting effect may appear on the bottom

of the recorded picture.

• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details.

Using the Protector/Filter (optional)

The MC protector (optional) is a transparent filter which affects neither the colors nor the

amount of light, so it can always be used to protect the camera’s lens.

The ND filter (optional) reduces the amount of light to approximately 1/8th (equal to

adjusting the aperture value 3 increments) without affecting the color balance.

PL filter (optional) will suppress the reflected light from a metal or non spherical surfaces

(flat non-metallic surfaces, water vapour or invisible particles in the air), making it possible

to take a picture with enhanced contrast.

Attach the filter.

Note

•

Do not attach multiple filters at the same time.

• If the filter is tightened too much, you may not be able to remove it. Do not tighten it too much.

•

If the filter is dropped, it may be destroyed. Be careful not to drop it when attaching it to the camera.

• Be careful not to get a fingerprint, dirt, etc., on the filter when it is attached, otherwise the focus

may be adjusted to the lens, resulting in the subject being out of focus.

• You can attach the lens cap or the lens hood when the filter is attached.

• Refer to the instructions for each filter for details.

• MCu“Multi-coated”

u“Neutral Density”

• Accessories other than filters, such as conversion lenses, cannot be mounted. It may cause

malfunction.

A MC protector

B ND filter

C PL filter

•

It is recommended to use the MC protector (DMW-LMC52; optional), the ND filter (DMW-LND52;

optional), or the PL filter (DMW-LPL52; optional) with the lens included in DMC-G10K.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 159 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

160

Others

Using the Remote Shutter (optional)

If you use the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional), you can avoid jitter (camera shake)

when using a tripod and you can keep the shutter pressed fully when taking pictures with

[B] (Bulb) or Burst Mode. The remote shutter works similar to the shutter button on the

camera.

Firmly connect the remote shutter to

the [REMOTE] socket on the camera as

far as it will go.

Take a picture.

1 Press the button lightly to press halfway.

2 Press the button fully to take the picture.

(Press it as far as it will go.)

∫ About [LOCK] on the remote shutter

•

You can keep the shutter button pressed fully. This is

effective when taking pictures with Burst Mode (P64) or

in [B] (Bulb) (P86).

• While pressing the shutter button fully, slide it to the

[LOCK] side.

• Slide it to the other side to cancel [LOCK].

Note

•

Do not use any other remote shutters except DMW-RSL1 (optional).

• You cannot operate the camera with the remote shutter in the following cases.

– When the Sleep Mode is canceled

REMOTE

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 160 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

161

VQT2S62

Others

Using the AC Adaptor

You can use the camera without worrying about battery discharge when it is connected to

a PC or a printer if you use the DC cable

(DMW-DCC3; optional) to connect the camera to

the battery charger/AC adaptor and connect the AC cable.

•

Check that the camera is turned off.

• Close the flash.

Connect the AC cable.

Connect the DC cable A.

• Pull open the DC cable cover 1 and then connect

the DC cable to the camera body using the same

steps as

“Inserting and Removing the Card

(optional)/the Battery

” (P24). Pull the DC cable

through the opening as shown in the illustration

and then close the battery door 2.

• Be careful not to catch the DC cable

(DMW-DCC3; optional) when closing the battery

door.

• You cannot charge the battery if you connect the

DC cable.

Note

•

Do not use any other AC cables except the supplied one.

• Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional). If

you use other DC cables, it may cause a malfunction.

• The camera becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

• Disconnect the charger/AC adaptor and DC cable when the camera is not in use.

• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor when recording motion

pictures.

• If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor the power supply is cut off due to a

power cut or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not

be recorded.

• The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is

always “live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 161 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

162

Others

LCD Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display

• The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ ] (LCD

monitor style) in the LCD monitor.

∫ In recording

Recording in Program AE Mode [ ] (Initial setting)

1 Flash Mode (P57)

2 Film Mode (P81)

3 Optical Image Stabilizer (P116)/ : Jitter

alert (P45)

4 : Burst (P64)

: Auto Bracket (P66)

: Self-timer (P68)

5 Picture size (P114)

6 Quality (P115)

7 Intelligent Exposure (P119)

8 Intelligent Resolution (P118)

9 Battery indication (P22)

10 Card (P25) (displayed only during

recording)

11 Recording state (Flashes red.)/

Focus (P45) (Lights green.)

12 AF area (P45, 69)

13 Dial operation guide (P128)/

Elapsed recording time (P100)

14 Number of recordable pictures

¢1

(P181)

15 White Balance (P76)

16 ISO sensitivity (P79)

17 Exposure compensation value (P63)/Manual Exposure Assistance (P85)

18 Shutter speed (P45)

19 Aperture value (P45)

20 Recording Mode (P37)

21 Metering mode (P118)

22 AF Mode (P69)

23 Focus Mode (P44)

24 Exposure Meter (P127)

999

303030

AWBAWBAWB

STDSTDSTD

3.53.53.5

1617

67 8 9

423

1520

AUTOAUTOAUTO

−

AFSAFSAFS

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 162 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

163

VQT2S62

Others

∫ In recording (after settings)

25 Flash output adjustment (P61)

26 2nd curtain synchro (P62)

27 Audio recording (P122)

28 Recording Quality (P102)

29 Extended Optical Zoom (when recording

motion pictures) (P47, 120)

30 Extended Optical Zoom (when taking still

pictures) (P47, 120)

31 Histogram (P56)

32 Travel date (P110)

AF Tracking operation (P41, 71)

33 Available recording time (P100):

White Balance Fine Adjustment (P78)

White Balance Bracket (P79)

36 My Color Mode

adjustment (P96)

37 Current date and time/“: Travel

destination setting

¢2, 3

(P112)

38 Custom settings (P98)

39 Program Shift (P46)

40 AE lock (P75)

41 Face Recognition (P104)

42 AF lock (P75)

43 Age

2, 4

(P94)

Location

2, 3

(P110)

44 Name

2, 4

(P94)

Number of days that have passed since the

departure date

2, 3

(P110)

45 Self-timer

¢5

(P68)

46 Spot metering target (P118)

47 Digital Zoom (P47, 120)

48 WIND CUT (P123)

1 [9999i] is displayed if there are more than 10000 pictures remaining.

¢2 Only displayed in the LCD monitor.

3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock

and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode.

¢4 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when this unit is turned on in [BABY1]/[BABY2] or

[PET] in Scene Mode.

¢5 This is displayed during countdown.

2625 302927

3739 34

AFLAFLAFL AELAELAEL

364041

C1C1C1

ndnd

BKTBKTBKT

AWBAWBAWB

1212s

12s

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 163 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

164

Others

∫ In playback

1 Playback Mode (P49)

2 Film Mode (P81)

3 Protected picture (P144)

4 Number of prints (P143)

5 Picture size (P114)

: Recording Quality (P102)

6 Quality (P115)

7 Intelligent Exposure (P119)

8 Intelligent Resolution (P118)

9 Battery indication (P22)

10 Picture number/Total pictures

11 Elapsed playback time (P130):

12 Motion picture recording time

(P130):

13 Favorites settings (P134)

14 Recording information

15 Age (P94)

16 Name

¢6

(P94, 107)/Location

¢6

(P110)/

Title

¢6

(P135)

17 Number of days that have passed since the

departure date (P110)

18 Audio playback (P131)

: Motion Picture Playback (P130)

19 Stamped with text indication (P136)

20 Favorites (P134)

Cable disconnection warning icon (P154)

21 Recorded date and time/World Time (P112)

22 Folder/File number (P153)

23 Color space

¢7

(P121)

24 Histogram (P56)

6 It is displayed in order of [TITLE], [LOCATION],

[NAME] ([BABY1]/[BABY2], [PET]), [NAME]

([FACE RECOG.]).

¢7 This is not displayed for motion pictures

recorded in Motion JPEG.

Detailed information display

Histogram display

303030

STDSTDSTD

F3.5F3.5F3.5

567321

1/91/91/9

14 13

3s3s

12s12s

12s

100-0001

F3.5

10:00 DEC. 1.2010

RGB

STANDARD

AFS

100

WBWB

ISOISO

F3.5

1/9

ISO

100

100-0001

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 164 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

165

VQT2S62

Others

Cautions for Use

Take care not to drop or knock the unit or put a lot of pressure on it.

•

Take care not to knock or drop the bag/case that you inserted the camera in as the shock may

cause damage to the camera, lens or LCD monitor.

• Do not use a paper bag as it can easily rip causing the camera to fall and be damaged.

• We strongly recommend you purchase a good camera bag/case from your local dealer to

protect your camera.

Keep the camera as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as

microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).

•

If you use the camera on top of or near a TV, the pictures and sound on the camera may be

disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.

• Do not use the camera near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely

affecting the pictures and sound.

• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields

created by speakers or large motors.

• Electromagnetic wave radiation generated by microprocessors may adversely affect the

camera, disturbing the pictures and sound.

• If the camera is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning

properly, turn the camera off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then reinsert

the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn the camera on.

Do not use the camera near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

•

If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and sound may

be adversely affected.

Always use the supplied cords and cables. If you use optional accessories, use the

cords and the cables supplied with them.

Do not extend the cords or the cables.

Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.

•

If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the

surface finish may peel off.

• Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period of time.

Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or disconnect the power plug from

the outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry soft cloth.

•

When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth,

and then with a dry cloth.

• Wipe off any dirt or dust on the zoom ring and the focus ring with a dry, dustless cloth.

• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the

camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off.

• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.

Optimal use of the camera

Cleaning

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 165 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

166

Others

∫ About dirt on the image sensor

This camera features an interchangeable lens system so dirt may get inside the camera

body when changing lenses. Depending on the recording conditions, dirt on the image

sensor may appear on the recorded picture.

Do not change lenses where there is a lot of dust, and always attach the body cap when a

lens is not attached to the camera, so that dirt or dust does not get inside the camera body.

Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.

Removing dirt on the image sensor

The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when

you do have to clean it yourself.

•

Blow off the dust on the surface of the image sensor with a commercially available blower

brush. Be careful not to blow too strongly.

• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount.

• Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched.

• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.

• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or your nearest Service

Center.

• As the eye cup cannot be removed, gently wipe it with a dry and soft cloth, and be careful not to

remove it.

• If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or your nearest Service

Center.

• Do not press the LCD monitor with excessive force. Uneven colors may appear on the LCD

monitor and it may malfunction.

• If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder will be

slightly darker than usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the

internal temperature of the camera increases.

Dust reduction function

This unit has a dust reduction function that will blow off the debris and dust that have

affixed to the front of the imaging device. This function will function automatically when

the camera is turned on, but if you see dust, perform the [SENSOR CLEANING]

(P128) in the [CUSTOM] menu.

For care of the eye cup on the viewfinder

About the LCD monitor/Viewfinder

Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the LCD monitor/

Viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or

green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. The LCD monitor/Viewfinder screen

has more than 99.99% effective pixels with a mere 0.01% of the pixels inactive or

always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures on a card.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 166 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

167

VQT2S62

Others

• Do not press the lens with excessive force.

• Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it

to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a window.

• When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on the surface of the lens, the picture may

be affected. Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry cloth before and after taking

pictures.

• Do not place the lens mount facing downwards. Do not allow the

lens mount contacts 1 to become dirty.

The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. Its ability to generate power comes

from the chemical reaction that takes place inside it. This reaction is susceptible to

the surrounding temperature and humidity. If the temperature is too high or too low,

the operating time of the battery will become shorter.

Always remove the battery after use.

If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the

terminals are damaged.

•

Inserting a damaged battery in the camera will damage the camera.

Bring charged spare batteries when going out.

•

Be aware that the operating time of the battery becomes shorter in low temperature conditions

such as at a ski resort.

• When you travel, do not forget to bring the battery charger (supplied) and the AC cable

(supplied) so that you can charge the battery in the country that you are traveling in.

Dispose of unusable battery.

•

The battery has a limited life.

• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.

• The unusable battery should be discarded in accordance with battery recycling laws. Call the

RBRC hotline at 1-800-822-8837 for information.

Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as

necklaces, hairpins etc.).

•

This can cause short circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a

battery.

• If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.

• Keep the charger 1 m (3.28 feet) or more away from radio.

• The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a malfunction.

• After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A very

small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)

• Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean.

About the Lens

Battery

Charger

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 167 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

168

Others

Do not leave the card where the temperature is high, where electromagnetic waves

or static electricity are easily generated or exposed to direct sunlight.

Do not bend or drop the card.

•

The card may be damaged or the recorded content may be damaged or deleted.

• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the

card.

• Do not allow dirt, dust or water to get into the terminals on the back of the card and do not touch

the terminals with your fingers.

Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card

•

“Format” or “delete” using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management information,

and it will not erase the data in the memory card completely.

It is recommended to physically destroy the memory card or use the commercially available

computer data deletion software to completely erase the data in the memory card before

transferring to another party or disposing.

Management of data in the memory card is the responsibility of the user.

If a name or birthday is set for [BABY1]/[BABY2]/face recognition function, this personal

information is kept in the camera and included in the recorded image.

Disclaimer

•

Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous

operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings.

Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage

from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information.

When requesting a repair, transferring to another party or disposing

•

Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (P35)

• Remove the memory card from the camera when requesting a repair.

• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.

• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or your nearest Service Center if

above operations are not possible due to malfunction.

When transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card, please refer to

“Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card” on

P168.

•

Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature: [Recommended

temperature:15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF), Recommended humidity: 40% to 60%]

• Always remove the battery and the card from the camera.

• If the battery is left inserted in the camera, it will discharge even if the camera is turned off. If

the battery continues to be left in the camera, it will discharge excessively and may become

unusable even if charged.

• When storing the battery for a long period of time, we recommend charging it once a year.

Remove the battery from the camera and store it again after it has completely discharged.

• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or

a cabinet.

• Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a long

period of time.

Card

About the personal information

When not using the camera for a long period of time

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 168 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

169

VQT2S62

Others

• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate

handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage suffered due to loss of recorded data.

• When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod is stable when this unit is attached to it.

• You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.

• Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or detaching

the camera. You may damage the screw on the camera if you use excessive force when

turning it. Also, the camera body and the rating label may be damaged or scratched if the

camera is attached too tightly to the tripod or unipod.

• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact with the

pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in

contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens. Therefore it is recommended to

attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1; optional) before mounting on the tripod/unipod.

• Read the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod carefully.

• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens (more than about 1 kg) to the camera body, do not

carry the camera by the soulder strap. Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.

Message Display

Confirmation messages or error messages will be displayed on the screen in some cases.

The major messages are described below as examples.

About the picture data

About tripods or unipods

About the shoulder strap

[THIS MEMORY CARD IS WRITE-PROTECTED]

> The Write-Protect switch on the card is moved to [LOCK]. Move the switch back to unlock

it. (P25)

[NO VALID PICTURE TO PLAY]

> Record a picture or insert a card with a recorded picture and then play it.

[THIS PICTURE IS PROTECTED]

> Delete the picture after canceling the protect setting. (P144)

[THIS PICTURE CANNOT BE DELETED]/[SOME PICTURES CANNOT BE DELETED]

•

Pictures not based on the DCF standard cannot be deleted.

> If you want to delete some pictures, format the card after saving necessary data on a PC

etc. (P35)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 169 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

170

Others

[NO ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS CAN BE MADE]

•

The number of pictures, which can be set at one time when [MULTI] has been selected for

[DELETE MULTI] (P53), [FAVORITE] (P134), [TITLE EDIT] (P135), [TEXT STAMP] (P136) or

[RESIZE] (P139) has been exceeded.

> Reduce the number of pictures set, and then repeat the operation.

• More than 999 favorites have been set.

[CANNOT BE SET ON THIS PICTURE]

•

[TITLE EDIT], [TEXT STAMP] or [PRINT SET] cannot be set for pictures not based on the

DCF standard.

[MEMORY CARD ERROR

FORMAT THIS CARD?]

•

It is a format that cannot be used with this unit.

> Format the card again with the camera after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P35)

[LENS NOT FOUND, OR “ ” SHOOT W/O LENS IS SET TO OFF.]/

[THE LENS IS NOT ATTACHED PROPERLY. DO NOT PUSH LENS RELEASE

BUTTON WHILE LENS IS ATTACHED.]/

[PLEASE CHECK THAT THE LENS IS ATTACHED CORRECTLY]

•

Do not press the lens release button while taking pictures.

• When using a Leica lens mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M or DMW-MA3R; optional), set

[SHOOT W/O LENS] (P128) to [ON] in the custom menu.

• Detach the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button. (P18)

Turn on the power again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.

[MEMORY CARD PARAMETER ERROR]/[THIS MEMORY CARD CANNOT BE USED]

> Use a card compatible with this unit. (P25)

• SD Memory Card (8 MB to 2 GB)

• SDHC Memory Card (4 GB to 32 GB)

• SDXC Memory Card (48 GB to 64 GB)

[INSERT SD CARD AGAIN]/[TRY ANOTHER CARD]

•

An error has occurred accessing the card.

> Insert the card again.

> Insert a different card.

[READ ERROR/WRITE ERROR

PLEASE CHECK THE CARD]

•

It has failed to read or write data.

> Remove the card after turning the power [OFF]. Insert the card again, turn the power on,

and try to read or write the data again.

• The card may be broken.

> Insert a different card.

[MOTION RECORDING WAS CANCELLED DUE TO THE LIMITATION OF THE

WRITING SPEED OF THE CARD]

•

Use a card with SD Speed Class

with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures.

¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing.

• In the event that it stops even after using a “Class 6” card or higher, the data writing speed has

deteriorated so it is recommended to make a backup and then format (P35).

• Depending on the type of the card, motion picture recording may stop in the middle.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 170 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

171

VQT2S62

Others

[THIS CARD IS NOT FORMATTED WITH THIS CAMERA, AND NOT SUITABLE FOR

MOVIE RECORDING.]

•

The writing speed is lower if the card has been formatted using a PC or other equipment. As a

consequence, motion picture recording may stop in the middle. If this happens, make a

backup of the data and format (P35) the card in this unit.

[A FOLDER CANNOT BE CREATED]

•

A folder cannot be created because there are no remaining folder numbers that can be used.

(P153)

> Format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P35) If you execute

[NO.RESET] in the [SETUP] menu after formatting, the folder number is reset to 100.

(P35)

[PICTURE IS DISPLAYED FOR 16:9 TV]/[PICTURE IS DISPLAYED FOR 4:3 TV]

•

The AV cable is connected to the camera.

> Press [MENU/SET] if you want to delete this message at once.

> Select [TV ASPECT] in the [SETUP] menu if you want to change the TV aspect. (P33)

• This message also appears when the USB connection cable is connected to the camera only.

In this case, connect the other end of the USB connection cable to a PC or a printer. (P152,

154)

[NO BATTERY POWER REMAINS]

•

The remaining battery power is low.

> Charge the battery.

[THIS BATTERY CANNOT BE USED]

•

The battery cannot be recognized by the camera.

> Use a genuine Panasonic battery. If this message is displayed even when a genuine

Panasonic battery is used, contact the dealer or your nearest Service Center.

• The battery cannot be recognized as its terminal is dirty.

> Remove any dirt etc. from the terminal.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 171 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

172

Others

Troubleshooting

First, try out the following procedures (P172–180).

•

The battery is not inserted correctly. (P24)

• The battery is exhausted.

• Charge the battery.

• AC adaptor is not connected properly. (P161)

• Is the display set to viewfinder?

> Press [LVF/LCD] button to switch to LCD monitor display. (P36)

• Is [AUTO LCD OFF] (P32) of the [ECONOMY] Mode active?

> Press the shutter button halfway to cancel these modes.

• Is the LCD monitor switched off?

> Switch the display by pressing [DISPLAY]. (P54)

• The battery is exhausted.

• Charge the battery.

• The battery is exhausted.

• Charge the battery.

• If you leave the camera on, the battery will be exhausted.

> Turn the camera off frequently by using the [ECONOMY] Mode etc. (P32)

• If you connect to a TV compatible with VIERA Link with a HDMI mini cable (optional) and turn

off the power on the TV with the remote control for the TV, the power on this unit also turns off.

> If you are not using VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (P34)

• Is the temperature of the battery excessively high or low? If it is, it will take longer than usual to

charge the battery or charging may remain incomplete.

• Are the terminals of the charger or battery dirty?

> Wipe off the dirt using a dry cloth.

If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [RESET] (P35) on the

[SETUP] menu.

Battery and power source

The camera cannot be operated even when it is turned on.

The LCD monitor turns off while the camera is turned on.

The camera turns off immediately after it is turned on.

This unit is turned off automatically.

The [CHARGE] lamp flashes.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 172 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

173

VQT2S62

Others

• Is the subject focused?

> [FOCUS PRIORITY] is set to [ON] at the time of purchase, and so you cannot take pictures

until the subject is in focus. If you want to be able to take a picture when you press the

shutter button fully even if the subject is not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the

[CUSTOM] menu to [OFF]. (P126)

• Picture might look whitish when lens or image sensor gets dirty with finger print or similar.

> If the lens is dirty turn the camera off and then gently wipe the lens surface with a soft dry

cloth.

> Refer to P166 when the image sensor gets dirty.

> Check that the exposure is correctly compensated. (P63)

• Is the AE Lock (P75) applied incorrectly?

> Unset the settings of White Balance Bracket (P79).

• The subject is beyond the focus range of the camera. (P43)

• There is camera shake (jitter) or the subject is moving slightly. (P45)

• Is [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM] menu set to [OFF]? (P126)

In this case, the picture may not be properly focused even if [AFS] or [AFC] in Focus Mode is

set.

• Is the AF Lock (P75) applied incorrectly?

• The shutter speed will become slower and the Optical Image Stabilizer function may not work

properly when taking pictures especially in dark places.

> We recommend holding the camera firmly with both hands when taking pictures. (P36)

> We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P68) when taking pictures with a slow

shutter speed.

• Is the number of recordable pictures 2 or less?

Recording

Taking pictures is not possible.

The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed.

The recorded picture is whitish.

The recorded picture is too bright or dark.

2 or 3 pictures are taken at one time.

The subject is not focused properly.

The recorded picture is blurred.

The Optical Image Stabilizer is not effective.

Taking pictures using White Balance Bracket is not possible.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 173 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

174

Others

• Is the ISO sensitivity high or the shutter speed slow?

(ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] when the camera is shipped. Therefore, when taking pictures

indoors etc. noise will appear.)

> Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P79)

> Increase the setting for [NOISE REDUCTION] in [FILM MODE] or lower the setting for each

of the items other than [NOISE REDUCTION]. (P82)

> Take pictures in bright places.

> Set the [LONG SHTR NR] to [ON]. (P120)

• Is the [PICTURE SIZE] (P114) or the [QUALITY] (P115) set low?

• Is the [DIGITAL ZOOM] set? (P120)

• If recording under fluorescent light, the brightness or the hue may change slightly when the

shutter speed becomes fast. This occurs due to the characteristics of fluorescent light. It is not

a malfunction.

• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. It appears

when the subject has a bright part. Some unevenness may occur in the surrounding areas, but

this is not a malfunction.

It is recorded in motion pictures but is not recorded on still pictures.

• It is recommended that you take pictures while taking care not to expose the screen to sunlight

or any other source of strong light.

• This could be an inactive pixel. Perform the [PIXEL REFRESH] (P128) in the [CUSTOM] menu.

• Are you in Exposure Compensation operation?

> Press the rear dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation. (P63)

• Set the AF area to the distinctive color of the subject if there is a part that is different from the

surrounding color. (P71)

The recorded picture looks rough.

Noise appears on the picture.

Under fluorescent lighting, flicker or horizontal bars may be seen.

•

This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup

sensors.

This is not a malfunction.

• If there is marked flicker or striping when recording motion pictures, the

Flicker Reduction Function will be forcefully activated by setting the Flicker

Reduction Function to [ON] (P101), which will adjust the shutter speed to

1/100. It is possible to select the shutter speed to adjust from 1/50, 1/60,

1/100, or 1/120 by rotating the rear dial.

The brightness or the hue of the recorded picture is different from the actual

scene.

Reddish horizontal streaks appear on the LCD monitor during recording.

Bright spot not in subject is recorded.

You cannot compensate the exposure.

Subject cannot be locked.

(AF Tracking not possible)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 174 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

175

VQT2S62

Others

• Use a card with SD Speed Class

with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures.

¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing.

• Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the middle.

> If motion picture recording stops during use of a card of at least “Class 6” or if you use a

card that has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, the data-writing speed is lower.

In such cases, we recommend that you make a backup of the data and then format (P35)

the card in this unit.

• Object seems to be warped slightly when the object moves across the image very fast, but this

is because the unit is using MOS for the image sensor. This is not a malfunction.

• With recording in a quiet environment, depending on the lenses used, the sound of aperture

and focus actions may be recorded in motion pictures. This is not a malfunction. Focus

operation while recording motion pictures can be set to [OFF] with [CONTINUOUS AF] (P123).

• Be careful while recording motion pictures because the sounds of the zoom operations, buttons

and dial operation etc. may be recorded.

• While recording motion pictures, plugging the aperture of the microphone with a finger may

reduce the level of audio recording or audio may not record at all. Also be careful because the

operation sound of lenses can easily be recorded at this time.

• Depending on the lens used, picture may be warped slightly or you may see colors along the

edge depending on the zoom factor, due to the characteristics of the lens. Also, the peripherals

of the image might look warped because the perspective is enhanced when the wide angle is

used. This is not a malfunction.

• The Optical Image Stabilizer function of the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K

only works correctly with supported cameras.

> When older Panasonic digital cameras (DMC-GF1, DMC-GH1, DMC-G1) are used,

[STABILIZER] in the [REC] Mode menu (P116) cannot be set to [OFF]. It is recommended

to update the firmware of the digital camera at the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/

> When using this lens with another make of digital cameras, the Optical Image Stabilizer

function will not work. (As of April 2010)

For details, contact the respective company.

Motion pictures

Motion picture recording stops in the middle.

Object seems to be warped.

In motion pictures, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.

The recorded sound is very quiet.

Lens

Recorded image may be warped, or nonexistent color is surrounding the

subject.

When the lens is attached to another digital camera, stabilizer function cannot be

turned off or stabilizer function does not work.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 175 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

176

Others

• Is the flash closed?

> Slide the [ OPEN] lever to open the flash. (P57)

• The flash is activated 2 times. The interval between the first and second flash is longer when

Red-eye Reduction (P59) is set so the subject should not move until the second flash is

activated.

• The LCD monitor turns off when [AUTO LCD OFF] (P32) is selected for the [ECONOMY] Mode.

[This does not happen when using the AC adaptor (P161).]

> Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor/viewfinder to a proper level. (P31)

• [POWER LCD] is activated. (P32)

• This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed

half-way, or when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction.

• Does the picture appear on the viewfinder?

> Press [LVF/LCD] to switch to LCD monitor display. (P36)

• Is the LCD monitor switched off?

> Switch the display by pressing [DISPLAY]. (P54)

• It is only displayed on the LCD monitor when the camera is connected to a PC or printer.

• This is not a malfunction.

These pixels do not affect the recorded pictures.

• In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the LCD monitor.

Flash

The flash is not activated.

The flash is activated 2 times.

LCD monitor/Viewfinder

The LCD monitor turns off although the camera is turned on.

The LCD monitor/Viewfinder is too bright or dark.

It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change significantly

for an instant.

The picture is not displayed on the LCD monitor.

LCD monitor and viewfinder do not switch when [LVF/LCD] is pressed.

Black, red, blue and green dots appear on the LCD monitor.

Noise appears on the LCD monitor.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 176 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

177

VQT2S62

Others

• This is a characteristic of the drive system of the viewfinder of this unit, and it is not a

malfunction. There will be no problem with the recorded image.

• You can display the pictures without being rotated when [ROTATE DISP.] (P142) is set to

[OFF].

• You can rotate pictures with the [ROTATE] function. (P142)

• You can only display the pictures rotated if you use a lens (P15) that supports the Direction

Detection Function (P36) and [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [ON].

• Did you press [(]?

• Is the card inserted?

• Is there a picture on the card?

• Is this a picture whose file name has been changed in the PC? If it is, it cannot be played back

by this unit.

• Has [PLAYBACK MODE] been set for playback?

> Change to [NORMAL PLAY]. (P133)

• Is this a non-standard picture, a picture which has been edited using a PC or a picture which

was taken by another make of digital camera?

• Did you remove the battery immediately after picture-taking or did you take the picture using a

battery with a low remaining charge?

> Format the data to delete the pictures mentioned above. (P35)

(Other pictures will be deleted as well and it will not be possible to restore them.

Therefore, check well before formatting.)

•

Is the clock in the camera set properly? (P26)

• Images edited on a PC or images recorded on other cameras might display a different date to

the recorded date during the Calendar Playback.

You see red, green, or blue flashes when you move your eyes in the viewfinder,

or when the camera is moved rapidly.

Playback

The picture being played back is not rotated, or is rotated in an unexpected

direction, when displayed.

The picture is not played back.

There are no recorded pictures.

The folder number and the file number are displayed as [—] and the screen turns

black.

Images with different date as recorded date are played back in the Calendar

Playback.

White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture.

•

If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white round

spots may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting of particles of

dust in the air. This is not a malfunction.

A characteristic of this is that the number of round spots and their position

differ in every picture.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 177 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

178

Others

• Is it a picture that has been recorded with other equipment? In such cases, these pictures may

be displayed with a deteriorated picture quality.

• When Digital Red-Eye Correction ([], [], []) is in operation, if you take a picture

of subject with red color surrounded by a skin tone color, that red part may be corrected to

black by the Digital Red-Eye Correction function.

> It is recommend to take picture with Flash Mode set to [‡], [‰] or [Œ], or

[RED-EYE REMOVAL] on the [REC] Mode menu set to [OFF]. (P117)

• Is the camera connected to the TV correctly?

> Set the TV input to external input mode.

• Output from the [HDMI] socket is not possible when it is connected to the PC or the printer.

> Connect it only to the TV.

• Depending on the TV model, the pictures may be extended horizontally or vertically or they

may be displayed with their edges cut off.

• Are you trying to play back the motion pictures by directly inserting the card in the card slot of

the TV?

> Connect the camera to the TV with the AV cable (supplied), or with the HDMI mini cable

(optional), and then play back the motion pictures on the camera. (P146, 147)

> Check [TV ASPECT] setting. (P33)

• Is it connected properly with the HDMI mini cable (optional)? (P147)

> Confirm that the HDMI mini-cable (optional) is firmly fitted.

> Press [(] on this unit.

• Is the [VIERA Link] on this unit set to [ON]? (P34)

> Depending on HDMI terminal of the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In

this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch input. (For details on how to switch

input, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

> Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.

> Turn the power to the unit off and then back on again.

> Set [VIERA Link] to [Off] on the TV and then turn it back to [On]. (Refer to the operating

instructions of the TV for details.)

> Check [VIDEO OUT] setting. (P33)

[THUMBNAIL IS DISPLAYED] appears on the screen.

Red part of the recorded image has changed color to black.

TV, PC and printer

The picture does not appear on the television.

The display areas on the TV screen and the camera’s LCD monitor are different.

The motion pictures cannot be played back on a TV.

The picture is not displayed fully on the TV.

VIERA Link does not work.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 178 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

179

VQT2S62

Others

• Is the camera connected to the PC correctly?

• Is the camera recognized by the PC correctly?

> Set to [PC] in [USB MODE]. (P33, 152)

> Disconnect the USB connection cable. Connect it again while the card is inserted in the

camera.

> Check if your PC is compatible with SDXC memory cards.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

> A message prompting to format the card may be displayed when connecting, but do not

format.

> If the [ACCESS] displayed on the LCD monitor does not disappear, disconnect the

USB

connection cable

after turning off the power.

• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer which does not support PictBridge.

> Set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in [USB MODE]. (P33, 154)

> When using a printer with a Cropping or borderless printing function, cancel this function

before printing. (For details, refer to the operating instructions for the printer.)

> When you order photo studios to print pictures, ask the photo studio if the pictures can be

printed with both ends.

• It is a sound of lens movement or aperture operation when the power is turned [ON] or [OFF],

and it is not a malfunction.

• You may hear a sound from the lens and image in the LCD monitor may suddenly change when

the brightness has changed by zoom operation or moving the camera, but there is no effect on

recording.

The sound is caused by the automatic adjustment of the aperture. This is not a malfunction.

> Press [MENU/SET], select the [SETUP] menu icon [ ] and then select the [~] icon to set

the desired language. (P35)

• This is a highlight function showing the white saturated area. (P124)

• Is the [HIGHLIGHT] set to [ON]?

• In dark places, the AF Assist Lamp (P126) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject.

The picture cannot be transferred when the camera is connected to a PC.

The card is not recognized by the PC.

The card is not recognized by the PC. (SDXC memory card is used)

The picture cannot be printed when the camera is connected to a printer.

The ends of the pictures are cut at printing.

Others

There is a sound from lens unit.

An unreadable language was selected by mistake.

Part of the picture is flashing in black and white.

A red lamp sometimes turns on when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 179 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

180

Others

• Is [AF ASSIST LAMP] on the [CUSTOM] menu set to [ON]? (P126)

• The AF Assist Lamp does not turn on in bright places.

• The surface of the camera may become warm during use. This does not affect the performance

or quality of the camera.

• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.

> [PLEASE SET THE CLOCK] message will be displayed; please re-set the clock. When

taking pictures, it will not be possible to record the correct date without setting the clock.

(P26)

• When you perform an operation after taking a certain action, the pictures may be recorded in

folders with different numbers from the ones used prior to the operation. (P153)

• If the battery was inserted or removed without first turning the camera’s power off, the folder

and file numbers for the pictures taken will not be stored in the memory. When the power is

then turned back on and pictures are taken, they may be stored under file numbers which

should have been assigned to previous pictures.

• Check the clock (P26) and birthday settings (P94).

The AF Assist Lamp does not turn on.

The camera becomes warm.

The clock is reset.

The file numbers are not recorded consecutively.

The file numbers are recorded in ascending order.

Age is not displayed correctly.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 180 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

181

VQT2S62

Others

Number of Recordable Pictures and Available

Recording Time

• The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time are an approximation.

(These vary depending on the recording conditions and the type of card.)

• The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time varies depending on the

subjects.

∫ Number of recordable pictures

•

[9999i] is displayed if there are more than 10000 pictures remaining.

Aspect ratio X

Picture size

(12M) (6M)

Quality A › A ›

Card

256 MB

34 71 11 13 63 125 13 14

512 MB

70 140 22 26 125 250 26 29

1GB 140 280 45 54 250 510 52 59

2GB

290 570 92 110 520 1020 105 120

4GB

570 1130 180 210 1030 2010 210 230

6GB 870 1720 270 320 1560 3050 320 350

8GB

1160 2310 370 440 2090 4090 430 480

12 GB

1760 3490 550 660 3160 6170 650 720

16 GB 2350 4660 740 880 4220 8230 860 960

24 GB

3410 6760 1080 1280 6130 11950 1260 1400

32 GB

4710 9350 1490 1770 8470 16520 1740 1930

48 GB 6740 13000 2160 2560 12140 22760 2520 2800

64 GB

9150 17650 2940 3480 16470 30890 3430 3800

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 181 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

182

Others

Aspect ratio X Y

Picture size

(3M) (10.5M)

Quality A › A ›

Card

256 MB

100 200 14 15 38 77 12 14

512 MB

200 400 28 30 77 155 24 29

1GB 400 800 57 61 155 310 50 60

2GB

820 1610 115 125 310 620 100 120

4GB

1620 3170 220 240 620 1230 200 240

6GB 2470 4820 340 370 940 1870 300 360

8GB

3310 6460 460 500 1270 2500 410 490

12 GB

5000 9740 700 750 1910 3770 620 740

16 GB 6670 13000 940 1010 2550 5040 830 980

24 GB

9690 18880 1360 1460 3710 7320 1200 1430

32 GB

13390 26080 1880 2020 5130 10110 1660 1980

48 GB 18210 33110 2710 2910 7280 14000 2390 2840

64 GB

24710 44930 3680 3950 9880 19010 3250 3860

Aspect ratio Y

Picture size

(5M) (2.5M)

Quality A › A ›

Card

256 MB

68 135 14 16 105 200 15 17

512 MB

135 270 29 32 210 410 31 34

1GB 270 540 58 65 420 820 63 68

2GB

550 1070 115 130 850 1610 125 135

4GB

1090 2110 230 260 1670 3170 250 270

6GB 1660 3210 350 390 2540 4820 380 410

8GB

2230 4300 470 530 3400 6460 510 550

12 GB

3360 6490 720 800 5140 9740 780 840

16 GB 4490 8660 960 1070 6860 13000 1040 1120

24 GB

6520 12580 1400 1560 9960 18880 1510 1630

32 GB

9010 17390 1930 2150 13760 26080 2090 2250

48 GB 12550 22760 2780 3080 19170 33110 3010 3220

64 GB

17040 30890 3770 4180 26010 44930 4080 4370

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 182 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

183

VQT2S62

Others

Aspect ratio W

Picture size

(9M) (4.5M)

Quality A › A ›

Card

256 MB

43 86 14 17 73 145 16 19

512 MB

86 170 29 35 145 290 33 38

1GB 175 340 58 70 290 580 68 77

2GB

350 700 115 140 600 1180 135 155

4GB

700 1380 230 280 1180 2310 270 300

6GB 1060 2100 350 430 1790 3520 410 460

8GB

1420 2820 480 570 2400 4720 550 620

12 GB

2150 4250 720 860 3630 7120 830 940

16 GB 2870 5670 960 1150 4840 9500 1120 1260

24 GB

4170 8240 1400 1680 7030 13790 1620 1830

32 GB

5760 11390 1930 2320 9710 19060 2240 2530

48 GB 8270 15830 2780 3310 13490 26010 3190 3600

64 GB

11230 21490 3770 4490 18300 35300 4330 4890

Aspect ratio W

Picture size

(2M) (9M)

Quality A › A ›

Card

256 MB 220 430 20 21 47 94 14 17

512 MB

440 860 40 42 95 185 29 34

1GB

900 1720 81 84 190 380 59 69

2GB 1800 3410 160 170 390 760 120 140

4GB

3540 6700 320 330 760 1500 230 270

6GB

5390 10190 490 510 1160 2290 350 420

8GB 7220 13640 650 680 1560 3060 480 560

12 GB

10890 20580 990 1030 2350 4620 720 850

16 GB

14530 27450 1320 1380 3140 6170 970 1140

24 GB 21100 39860 1920 2000 4560 8960 1400 1660

32 GB

29150 55070 2650 2770 6310 12390 1940 2290

48 GB

36420 60710 3750 3910 8880 16550 2780 3250

64 GB 49430 82380 5090 5310 12050 22460 3770 4410

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 183 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

184

Others

Aspect ratio

Picture size

(4.5M) (2M)

Quality A › A ›

Card

256 MB 85 165 17 19 210 390 19 20

512 MB

170 330 34 37 410 790 38 40

1GB

340 670 68 76 830 1580 77 81

2GB 690 1360 135 150 1650 3070 155 165

4GB

1370 2680 270 300 3260 6030 310 320

6GB

2080 4070 410 460 4950 9170 470 490

8GB 2780 5450 550 610 6630 12270 630 660

12 GB

4200 8230 840 930 10010 18520 950 990

16 GB

5610 10980 1120 1240 13350 24700 1270 1320

24 GB 8150 15940 1630 1800 19390 35870 1840 1920

32 GB

11260 22020 2250 2490 26790 49560 2540 2660

48 GB

15170 28010 3190 3530 36420 60710 3640 3790

64 GB 20590 38020 4330 4790 49430 82380 4940 5140

Aspect ratio X Y W

Quality

Card

256 MB

16 18 22 21

512 MB

33 37 44 42

1GB 67 75 89 86

2GB

135 150 180 170

4GB

260 300 350 340

6GB 400 450 540 520

8GB

540 610 720 690

12 GB

820 920 1090 1050

16 GB 1090 1220 1450 1400

24 GB

1590 1780 2110 2030

32 GB

2190 2460 2920 2810

48 GB 3190 3570 4180 4040

64 GB

4330 4840 5680 5490

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 184 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

185

VQT2S62

Others

∫ Available recording time (when recording motion pictures)

¢ Motion pictures can be recorded continuously up to 2 GB.

The maximum available recording time for up to 2 GB only is displayed on the screen.

Note

•

The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time displayed on the screen

may not decrease in order.

• If you set [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (P120) to [ON], [ ] is displayed on the screen when the picture

size is set to a size other than the maximum picture size for each aspect ratio.

Recording quality

setting

Card

256 MB

59 s 2 min 35 s 2 min 40 s 7 min 50 s

512 MB

2 min 00 s 5 min 10 s 5 min 20 s 15 min 40 s

1GB 4min 00s 10min 20s 10min 50s 31min 20s

2GB

8 min 20 s 21 min 20 s 22 min 10 s 1 h 03 min

4GB

16 min 30 s 41 min 50 s 43 min 40 s 2 h 05 min

6GB

25 min 10 s 1 h 03 min 1 h 06 min 3 h 11 min

8GB

33 min 40 s 1 h 25 min 1 h 28 min 4 h 15 min

12 GB

50 min 50 s 2 h 08 min 2 h 14 min 6 h 26 min

16 GB 1 h 08 min 2 h 52 min 2 h 59 min 8 h 35 min

24 GB

1 h 38 min 4 h 09 min 4 h 19 min 12 h 27 min

32 GB

2 h 16 min 5 h 45 min 5 h 59 min 17 h 13 min

48 GB

3 h 20 min 8 h 27 min 8 h 48 min 25 h 18 min

64 GB

4 h 32 min 11 h 28 min 11 h 56 min 34 h 21 min

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 185 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

186

Others

Specifications

Digital Camera Body

(DMC-G10): Information for your safety

Power Source: DC 9.3 V

Power Consumption: 2.5 W (When recording with LCD Monitor)

(When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K

is used)

1.5 W (When playing back with LCD Monitor)

(When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K

is used)

Camera effective pixels

: 12,100,000 pixels

Image sensor: 4/3q Live MOS sensor, total pixel number 13,060,000 pixels,

Primary color filter

Digital Zoom: Max. 4k

Extended Optical Zoom:

(Except for the maximum

picture size for each

aspect ratio)

ON/OFF simple enlargement (compatible with lenses from

other manufacturers)

Focus: Auto Focus/Manual Focus, Face Detection/AF Tracking/

23-area-focusing/1-area-focusing

Shutter system: Focal-plane shutter

Burst recording

Burst speed: 3.2 pictures/second (High speed),

2.6 pictures/second (Middle speed),

2 pictures/second (Low speed)

Number of recordable

pictures: Max. 7 pictures (when there are RAW files)

Depends on the capacity of the card

(when there are no RAW files)

ISO sensitivity

(Standard Output

Sensitivity): AUTO/ /100/200/400/800/1600/3200/6400

(1/3 EV step change possible)

Shutter speed: B (Bulb) (max. 4 minutes),

60 seconds to 1/4000th of a second

Metering range: EV 0 to EV 18

White Balance: Auto White Balance/Daylight/Cloudy/Shade/Incandescent

lights/Flash/White set1/White set2/White Balance K set

Exposure (AE): Program AE (P)/Aperture-priority AE (A)/Shutter-priority AE (S)/

Manual Exposure (M)/AUTO

Exposure Compensation (1/3 EV Step, j3EV to i3EV)

Metering mode: Multiple/Center weighted/Spot

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 186 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

187

VQT2S62

Others

LCD monitor: 3.0q TFT LCD

(Approx. 460,000 dots) (field of view ratio about 100%)

Viewfinder: Color LCD Viewfinder (Approx. 202,000 dots)

(field of view ratio about 100%)

(with diopter adjustment j4 to i4diopter)

Flash: Built-in pop up flash

GN 11 equivalent (ISO100·m)

Flash range:

Approx. 45 cm (1.48 feet) to 6.2 m (20.3 feet)

(When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is

mounted, WIDE, [ISO AUTO] is set)

AUTO, AUTO/Red-Eye Reduction, Forced ON, Forced ON/

Red-Eye Reduction, Slow Sync., Slow Sync./Red-Eye

Reduction, Forced OFF

Flash synchronization

speed: Equal to or smaller than 1/160th of a second

Microphone: Monaural

Speaker: Monaural

Recording media: SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card/SDXC Memory Card

Picture size

Still picture: When the aspect ratio setting is [X]

4000k3000 pixels, 2816k2112 pixels, 2048k1536 pixels

When the aspect ratio setting is [Y]

4000k2672 pixels, 2816k1880 pixels, 2048k1360 pixels

When the aspect ratio setting is [W]

4000k2248 pixels, 2816k1584 pixels, 1920k1080 pixels

When the aspect ratio setting is [ ]

2992k2992 pixels, 2112k2112 pixels, 1504k1504 pixels

Motion pictures: When set to [HD]: 1280k720 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/

When set to [WVGA]: 848k480 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/

When set to [VGA]: 640k480 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/

When set to [QVGA]: 320k240 pixels (30 frames/sec.)

Quality: RAW/RAWiFine/RAWiStandard/Fine/Standard

Recording file format

Still Picture: JPEG (based on “Design rule for Camera File system”, based

on “Exif 2.21” standard)/DPOF corresponding

Pictures with audio: JPEG (based on “Design rule for Camera File system”, based

on “Exif 2.21” standard)r“QuickTime”

Motion pictures: “QuickTime Motion JPEG” (motion pictures with audio)

Interface

Digital: “USB 2.0” (High Speed)

Analog video/audio: NTSC/PAL Composite (Switched by menu)

Audio line output (monaural)

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 187 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

188

Others

Terminal

[REMOTE]: φ 2.5 mm jack

[AV OUT/DIGITAL]: Dedicated jack (8 pin)

[HDMI]: MiniHDMI TypeC

[DC IN]: None (when using an AC adaptor, use optional DC cable)

Dimensions: Approx. 124 mm (W)k83.6 mm (H)k74.0 mm (D)

[4.88q (W)k3.29q(H)k2.91q (D)]

(excluding the projecting parts)

Mass (weight): Approx. 558 g/1.23 lb

(with the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K,

card and battery)

Approx. 336 g/0.74 lb (camera body)

Operating temperature:

0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)

Operating humidity: 10% to 80%

Language select: [ENGLISH]/[FRANÇAIS]/[ESPAÑOL]/[PORTUGUÊS]

AC Adaptor (Panasonic DE-A49B):

Information for your safety

Input: 110 V to 240 V 50/60 Hz, 0.3 A

Output: 9.3 V 1.2 A (Unit operation)

8.4 V 0.65 A (Battery charging)

Battery Pack (lithium-ion) (Panasonic DMW-BLB13PP):

Information for your safety

Voltage/capacity : 7.2 V/1250 mAh

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 188 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

189

VQT2S62

Others

Interchangeable Lens (H-FS014042)

“LUMIX G VARIO 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.”

Focal length: f=14 mm to 42 mm

(35 mm film camera equivalent: 28 mm to 84 mm)

Aperture type: 7 leaf shutters/iris diaphragm/circular diaphragm

Aperture range: F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)

Minimum aperture

value: F22

Lens construction: 12 elements in 9 groups (1 non-spherical lenses)

In focus distance: 0.3 m (0.99 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line)

Maximum image

magnification: 0.16k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.32k)

Optical Image Stabilizer:Available

[O.I.S.] switch: None

(Setting of the [STABILIZER] is done in [REC] mode menu.)

Mount: “Micro Four Thirds Mount”

Angle of view: 75x (Wide) to 29x (Tele)

Filter diameter: 52 mm (2.05 inch)

Max. diameter: Approx. 60.6 mm (2.39 inch)

Overall length: Approx. 63.6 mm (2.50 inch)

(from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)

Mass (weight): Approx. 165 g/0.22 lb

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 189 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

190

Others

Digital Camera Accessory System

Shoulder Strap

DMW-SSTL1

DMW-SSTG1

DMW-SSTG2

DMW-SSTG3

Soft Bag

Leather Bag

DMW-DCC3 DC Cable

Accessory#

Description

Figure

DMW-FL220

DMW-FL360

DMW-FL500

H-H020

H-FS014045

H-FS045200

H-VS014140

H-F007014

H-ES045

Flash

DMW-BLB13PP Lithum Ion Battery

Interchangeable Lens

DMW-RSL1 Remote Shutter

: DMW-LMC52

: DMW-LND52

: DMW-LPL52

Soft Case

: MC Protector

: ND Filter

: PL Filter (Circular Type)

DMW-BAG1

DMW-BAL1

DMW-CG1

DMW-CG2

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 190 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

191

VQT2S62

Others

Product numbers correct as of April 2010. These may be subject to change.

¢1 We recommend to use these filters for the lens included in DMC-G10K.

If you are using other lenses, please use the filters compatible with that lens.

2 When the 14–42 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-G10K is used

3 Use if the attached lens is in contact with the tripod pedestal.

• Read P15 for information about other lenses that can be used.

• Refer to P21 for information about the battery charging time and the number of recordable

pictures.

• NOTE: Accessories and/or model numbers may vary between countries. Consult your local

dealer.

• Refer to catalogues/Web pages for most current information regarding optional accessories.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

Class 10 64 GB SDXC Memory Card

Class 10 48 GB SDXC Memory Card

Class 10 32 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 10 16 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 10 8 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 10 4 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 4 16 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 4 8 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 4 4 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 4 2 GB SD Memory Card

Class 2 8 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 2 4 GB SDHC Memory Card

Class 2 2 GB SD Memory Card

RP-SDW64GU1K

RP-SDW48GU1K

RP-SDW32GU1K

RP-SDW16GU1K

RP-SDW08GU1K

RP-SDW04GU1K

RP-SDP16GU1K

RP-SDP08GU1K

RP-SDP04GU1K

RP-SDP02GU1K

RP-SDR08GU1A

RP-SDR04GU1A

RP-SDR02GU1A

HDMI mini Cable

RP-CDHM15

RP-CDHM30

Mount Adaptor

Tripod Adaptor

DMW-MA1

DMW-MA2M

DMW-MA3R

Accessory#

Description

Figure

DMW-TA1

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 191 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

192

Others

Digital Camera Accessory Order Form

(For USA and Puerto Rico Customers)

In CANADA, please contact your local Dealer for more information about accessories.

TO OBTAIN ANY OF OUR DIGITAL CAMERA ACCESSORIES YOU CAN DO ANY OF

THE FOLLOWING:

VISIT YOUR LOCAL PANASONIC DEALER

CALL PANASONIC’S ACCESSORY ORDER LINE AT 1-800-332-5368

[6 AM-6 PM M-F, PACIFIC TIME]

MAIL THIS ORDER TO: PANASONIC SERVICE AND TECHNOLOGY COMPANY

ACCESSORY ORDER OFFICE

20421 84th Avenue South Kent, WA. 98032

Ship To:

Mr.

Mrs.

Ms.

First Last

Street Address

City State Zip

Phone#:

Day

( )

Night

()

4. Shipping information (UPS delivery requires complete street address)

Please photocopy this form when placing an order.

3. Method of payment (check one)

Check of Money Order enclosed (NO C.O.D.SHIPMENTS)

VISA

MasterCard

Make Check or Money Order to: PANASONIC ACCESSORIES

(Please do not send cash)

2. Items Ordered

QuantityAccessory # Price EachDescription Total Price

6.95

Subtotal

Your State & Local Sales Tax

Shipping & Handling

Total Enclosed

1. Digital Camera Model #

Discover

Expiration Date

Credit Card #

Customer Signature

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 192 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

193

VQT2S62

Others

Limited Warranty

(ONLY FOR U.S.A. AND PUERTO RICO)

Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,

Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America

One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Panasonic Digital Still Camera Products

Limited Warranty

Limited Warranty Coverage (For USA and Puerto Rico Only)

If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship,

Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company (referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the length of

the period indicated on the chart below, which starts with the date of original purchase (“warranty

period”), at its option either (a) repair your product with new or refurbished parts, (b) replace it

with a new or a refurbished equivalent value product, or (c) refund your purchase price. The

decision to repair, replace or refund will be made by the warrantor.

During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts” warranty

period, there will be no charge for parts. This Limited Warranty excludes both parts and labor for

non-rechargeable batteries, antennas, and cosmetic parts (cabinet). This warranty only applies

to products purchased and serviced in the United States or Puerto Rico. This warranty is

extended only to the original purchaser of a new product which was not sold “as is”.

Product or Part Name Parts Labor

Digital Still Camera 1 year 1 year

CCD 6 months 90 days

SD Memory Cards, Rechargeable Battery Pack

(defective exchange)

90 days Not Applicable

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 193 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

VQT2S62

194

Others

Mail-In Service

For assistance in the U.S.A. and Puerto Rico in obtaining repairs, please ship the product

prepaid to:

Panasonic Exchange Center

4900 George McVay Drive

Suite B

McAllen, TX 78503

panacare

@us.panasonic.com

When shipping the unit, carefully pack, include all accessories, and send it prepaid, adequately

insured and preferably in the original carton. If Lithium Ion batteries are shipped by air the

package must be labeled “Contains Lithium Ion Battery (No lithium metal)”. Damaged batteries

are prohibited from shipment by US Mail. Batteries must be securely packed in a manner to

prevent short-circuiting and a package cannot contain more than 3 Lithium Ion batteries. Include

a letter detailing the complaint, a return address and provide a daytime phone number where

you can be reached. A valid registered receipt is required under the Limited Warranty.

IF REPAIR IS NEEDED DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD, THE PURCHASER WILL BE

REQUIRED TO FURNISH A SALES RECEIPT/PROOF OF PURCHASE INDICATING DATE

OF PURCHASE, AMOUNT PAID AND PLACE OF PURCHASE. CUSTOMER WILL BE

CHARGED FOR THE REPAIR OF ANY UNIT RECEIVED WITHOUT SUCH PROOF OF

PURCHASE.

Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions

This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and DOES

NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES NOT

COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by products not

supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse, abuse, neglect,

mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up adjustments, misadjustment of

consumer controls, improper maintenance, power line surge, lightning damage, modification,

introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or

other business or rental use of the product, or service by anyone other than a Factory Service

Center or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of God.

THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER “LIMITED

WARRANTY COVERAGE”.

THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF

THIS WARRANTY.

(As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, travel to and from the servicer, loss of or

damage to media or images, data or other memory or recorded content. The items listed are not

exclusive, but for illustration only.)

ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF

MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or

limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from

state to state. If a problem with this product develops during or after the warranty period, you

may contact your dealer or Service Center. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction,

then write to the warrantor's Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the

warrantor.

PARTS AND SERVICE, WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, ARE

YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 194 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

195

VQT2S62

Others

As of November 2009

Customer Services Directory (United States and Puerto Rico)

Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest Dealer or

Service Center; purchase Parts and Accessories; or make Customer Service and

Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:

http://www.panasonic.com/help

or, contact us via the web at:

http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo

You may also contact us directly at:

1-800-211-PANA (7262)

Monday-Friday 9am-9pm, Saturday-Sunday 10am-7pm EST

For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY: 1-877-833-8855

Accessory Purchases (United States and Puerto Rico)

Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic Products by

visiting our Web Site at:

http://www.pstc.panasonic.com

Or, send your request by E-mail to:

npcparts@us.panasonic.com

You may also contact us directly at:

1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only)

(Monday-Friday 9am-9pm EST)

Panasonic Service and Technology Company

20421 84th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032

(We accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express, and Personal Checks)

For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY: 1-866-605-1277

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 195 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

Others

VQT2S62

196

Others

Index

AC Adaptor ......................... 152, 154, 161

Access Indication ................................... 25

Advanced Scene Mode ......................... 88

AF Assist Lamp ................................... 126

AF Mode ................................................ 69

AF Tracking ..................................... 41, 71

AF/AE Lock ............................................ 75

AF/AE Lock Hold ................................. 125

AFC ................................................ 44, 69

AFrMF ................................................ 126

AFS ................................................. 44, 69

Aperture-priority AE ............................... 84

Aspect Ratio ................................ 113, 181

Aspect Ratio Conversion ..................... 141

Audio Recording .......................... 100, 122

Auto Bracket .................................. 66, 121

Auto LCD Off ......................................... 32

Auto Power LCD .................................... 32

Auto Review .......................................... 33

Auto White Balance ............................... 77

AV cable .............................................. 146

Available Recording Time .................... 185

Baby Mode ............................................ 94

Backlight Compensation ........................ 41

Battery ............................................. 21, 24

Beep ...................................................... 31

Body Cap ............................................... 17

Built-in Flash .......................................... 57

Bulb ....................................................... 86

Burst Mode ............................................ 64

Burst Rate ...................................... 64, 120

Calendar Playback ................................ 51

Card ................................................. 24, 25

Center Weighted .................................. 118

Charger ................................................ 167

Charging ................................................ 21

Cleaning .............................................. 165

Clock Set ......................................... 26, 31

Close-up Mode ...................................... 91

Color Space ................................. 121, 153

Color Temperature Setting .................... 78

Condensation .......................................... 5

Continuous AF (Motion Picture) .......... 123

Continuous AF (Still picture) ................ 125

Cropping .............................................. 140

Custom Mode ........................................ 99

Custom Set Memory ...................... 98, 123

Date Printing ................................ 143, 156

DC Cable ............................. 152, 154, 161

DCF standard ........................................ 49

Deleting Pictures ...................................52

Dial Guide ............................................ 128

Digital Red-eye Correction ............ 59, 117

Digital Zoom .................................. 47, 120

Diopter Adjustment ................................ 37

Direct AF Area ..................................... 125

Direction Detection Function ................. 36

Dust Reduction Function ..................... 166

Economy Mode ...................................... 32

Entering Text ....................................... 129

Exposure ............................................... 75

Exposure Compensation ....................... 63

Exposure Meter ................................... 127

Extended Optical Zoom ................. 47, 120

External flash ....................................... 158

Eye Cup ............................................... 166

EZ .................................... 47, 48, 114, 185

Face Detection ........................ 40, 69, 101

Face Recognition ......................... 104, 115

Face Recognition Edit ......................... 145

Favorite ................................................ 134

File Number ................................... 35, 153

Film Mode ...................................... 81, 113

Fine ...................................................... 115

Flash .............................................. 57, 116

Flash Adjust ................................... 61, 117

Flash Synchro ................................ 62, 117

Flicker Reduction Function .................. 101

Fn Button Set ....................................... 123

Focus ............................................... 45, 75

Focus Distance Reference Mark ........... 74

Focus Priority ....................................... 126

Folder Composition ............................. 153

Folder Number ............................... 35, 153

Formatting .............................................35

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 196 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

Others

197

VQT2S62

Guide Line ......................................56, 124

HDMI mini Cable ..................................147

HDMI Mode ............................................34

Highlight Display ..................................124

Histogram .......................................56, 124

Hot shoe ...............................................158

I.Resolution ..........................................118

IA Button Switch ...................................128

Intelligent Auto Mode .....................39, 101

Intelligent Exposure .............................119

Intelligent ISO ........................................80

Intelligent ISO sensitivity control ............80

ISO Increments ....................................119

ISO Limit Set ........................................119

ISO Sensitivity ........................................79

Jitter .......................................................45

Language Setting ...................................35

Layout ..................................................157

LCD Display Style ................................127

LCD Mode ..............................................32

LCD Monitor .............................36, 54, 162

LCD Priority Playback ..........................127

Lens .................................................15, 17

Lens Cap ................................................17

Lens Hood ..............................................19

Lens Rear Cap .......................................17

LONG SHUTTER NR ...........................120

LVF Display Style .................................127

Manual Exposure Assistance .................85

Manual Focus ........................................73

MC Protector ........................................159

Menu Resume ......................................128

Metering Mode .....................................118

MF ....................................................44, 73

MF Assist .......................................73, 126

MF Guide .............................................127

Microphone ..................................100, 122

Monitor/Viewfinder .................................31

Motion Picture Mode ............................100

Multi Film Bracket ..................................83

Multi Playback ........................................50

Multiple .................................................118

My Color Mode .......................................96

My Menu ................................................27

ND Filter ...............................................159

Night Portrait Mode ................................92

NO.RESET .............................................35

NTSC ......................................................33

Number of Prints ..................................156

Number of Recordable Pictures ...........181

Optical Image Stabilizer .................18, 116

Optical Zoom ..........................................47

PAL ........................................................ 33

Paper Size ...........................................157

Party Mode .............................................94

PC ..........................................................33

Peripheral Defocus Mode ......................95

Personal Information ............................168

Pet Mode ................................................95

PictBridge .............................................154

Picture Size ..................................114, 181

Pictures with Audio ..............................131

Pixel Refresh ........................................128

PL Filter ................................................159

Playback Mode ....................................133

Playback Pictures on TV ..............146, 147

Playback Zoom ......................................51

Playing Back Motion Pictures ..............130

Portrait Mode .........................................89

Power LCD .............................................32

Pre AF ..................................................125

Preview ..................................................87

Preview hold ........................................127

Print Setting .........................................143

Program AE ...........................................43

Program Shift .........................................46

Protect ..................................................144

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 197 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

Others

VQT2S62

198

Quality ......................................... 115, 181

Quick AF .............................................. 125

Quick Menu ........................................... 30

RAW .................................................... 115

RAWiFine .......................................... 115

RAWiStandard ................................... 115

Recording Quality Setting

(Motion Picture Mode) ......... 102, 122, 185

Remote Shutter ................................... 160

Reset of Setting ..................................... 35

Resizing ............................................... 139

Rotate .................................................. 142

Rotate Display ..................................... 142

Scene Detection ............................ 40, 101

Scene Menu .......................................... 34

Scene Mode .......................................... 93

Scenery Mode ....................................... 90

Self-timer ....................................... 68, 121

Sensor Cleaning .................................. 128

Setup Menu ........................................... 31

Shoot without lens ............................... 128

Shoulder Strap ....................................... 20

Shutter-priority AE ................................. 84

Sleep Mode ........................................... 32

Slide Show ........................................... 131

Sports Mode .......................................... 90

Spot ..................................................... 118

Standard .............................................. 115

Status Indicator ...................................... 39

Sunset Mode ......................................... 93

Text Stamp .......................................... 136

Thumbnail ............................................ 178

Title Edit ............................................... 135

Travel Date .................................... 31, 110

Tripod Adaptor ............................. 169, 191

Tripods ................................................. 169

TV Aspect .............................................. 33

Unipods ............................................... 169

USB Connection Cable ................ 152, 154

USB Mode ............................................. 33

Version Display ...................................... 35

Video out ................................................ 33

VIERA Link .................................... 34, 149

Viewfinder ................................ 36, 55, 162

Volume of Speakers .............................. 31

White Balance ....................................... 76

White Balance Bracket ..........................79

White Balance Fine Adjustment ............ 78

Wind cut ............................................... 123

World Time .................................... 31, 112

Zoom ............................................. 47, 120

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 198 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

199

VQT2S62

Others

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 199 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

• G MICRO SYSTEM is a lens exchange type digital camera system of

LUMIX based on a Micro Four Thirds System standard.

• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Olympus Imaging Corporation, in Japan, the

United States, the European Union and other countries.

• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Olympus Imaging Corporation, in Japan, the United States,

the European Union and other countries.

• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

• HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United

States and other countries.

• VIERA Link™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

• EZ Sync™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

• QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.,

used under license therefrom.

• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United

States and/or other countries.

• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

• Other names, company names, and product names printed in these instructions are

trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.

VQT2S62

F0410SM0

One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094

Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,

Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America

Panasonic Canada Inc.

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 2T3

 Panasonic Corporation 2010

Printed in China

For USA and Canada

DMC-G10KPP-VQT2S62_eng.book 200 ページ２０１０年４月２３日　金曜日　午後８時０分

Panasonic DMC-G10K Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Panasonic DMC-G10K

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info